SERIES

682XXB/683XXB
SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATORS

OPERATION MANUAL

490 JARVIS DRIVE P/N: 10370-10284

MORGAN HILL, CA 95037-2809 REVISION: H
PRINTED: AUGUST 1999
COPYRIGHT 1994 ANRITSU CO.
 WARRANTY
The ANRITSU product(s) listed on the title page is (are) warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for one year from the date of shipment.

ANRITSU's obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the
warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to ANRITSU
for warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. ANRITSU is not liable for con-
sequential damages.

LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty does not apply to ANRITSU connectors that have failed due to normal wear.
Also, the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by
the Buyer, unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation outside of the environmental specifica-
tions of the product. No other warranty is expressed or implied, and the remedies provided herein
are the Buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.

TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Adobe Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

NOTICE
ANRITSU Company has prepared this manual for use by ANRITSU Company personnel and cus-
tomers as a guide for the proper installation, operation and maintenance of ANRITSU Company
equipment and computer programs. The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein
are the property of ANRITSU Company, and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings,
specifications, and information is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole
or in part as the basis for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the
prior written consent of ANRITSU Company.
 Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, ANRITSU Company uses the
following symbols to indicate safety-related information. For your own safety, please read the information
carefully BEFORE operating the equipment.

WARNING WARNING indicates a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that

could result in personal injury or loss of life if not performed properly.
Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated condi-
tions are fully understood and met.

CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which,

if not performed properly, could result in damage to or destruction of a
component of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION note
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

The instrument is marked with this symbol to indicate that it is neces-

sary for the user to refer to the instructions in the operation manual.

Indicates ground.

Indicates heavy weight equipment.

682XXB/683XXB OM Safety-1
 For Safety
WARNING
When supplying power to this equipment, always use a
three-wire power cable connected to a three-wire power line
outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equip-
ment in this manner, there is a risk of receiving a severe or
fatal electric shock.

WARNING
Before changing the fuse, always remove the power cord
from the power outlet. There is the risk of receiving a fatal
electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power cord con-
nected.

Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by

the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument.

WARNING
There are no operator serviceable components inside. Refer
servicing of the instrument to qualified service technicians.

To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to preci-

sion components, do not remove the equipment covers.

WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or
use an equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this
equipment is lifted by one person.

Safety-2 682XXB/ 683XXB OM

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 - General Information

1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-6 RELATED MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
GPIB Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
SCPI Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Maintenance Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-8 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . 1-10
1-9 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT . . . . . . 1-11

Chapter 2 - Installation
2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Line Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Standby Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Warmup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION . . . . . 2-7
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
GPIB Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Setting the GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Selecting the Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Selecting the Interface Language. . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5 RACK MOUNTING KIT INSTALLATION . . . . . 2-10
Preliminary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

682XXB/683XXB OM i
Table of Contents (Continued)

2-6 PREPARATION FOR STORAGE/SHIPMENT . . . 2-13

Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Chapter 3 - Local (Front Panel) Operation

3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Line Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Data Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Data Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
RF Output Control Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3 DATA DISPLAY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Menu Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4 DATA ENTRY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5 INSTRUMENT START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Powering Up the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . 3-14
Start-Up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Self-Testing the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . . 3-15
Resetting to Default Parameters . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-6 ENTERING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Opening the Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Editing the Current Value . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Entering a New Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-7 CW FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting CW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting a CW Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
CW Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . 3-25
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Setting the Analog Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Selecting Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Setting Step Size and Dwell Time . . . . . . . . 3-29

ii 682XXB/683XXB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Frequency Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-9 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . 3-39
Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode . . . . . . . 3-39
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-10 POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION. . . . . . . 3-43
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . 3-43
Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and
Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Selecting a CW Power Sweep Trigger . . . . . . 3-45
Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range. . . . . . 3-46
Selecting a Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode . 3-48
Setting Power Level Step Size . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-11 LEVELING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Selecting a Leveling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Attenuator Decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
ALC Power Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
User Cal (User Level Flatness Correction) . . . 3-57
3-12 SIGNAL MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes . . . . 3-63
Providing Amplitude Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-63
Frequency Modulation Operating Modes . . . . 3-68
Providing Frequency Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-68
Phase Modulation Operating Modes. . . . . . . 3-73
Providing Phase Modulation . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Pulse Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . 3-77
Providing Pulse Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Configuring the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Configuring the Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Configuring the RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Configuring the GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Setting Increment Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-14 SAVING/RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS . 3-95
Saving Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

682XXB/683XXB OM iii
Table of Contents (Continued)

Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

Erasing Stored Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-15 SECURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-16 SCAN MODULATION (OPTION 20) . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-17 INTERNAL POWER METER (OPTION 8) . . . . . 3-99
3-18 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION . . 3-100

Chapter 4 - Local Operation–Menu Maps

4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-2 MENU MAP DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Chapter 5 - Operation Verification

5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 TEST EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3 TEST RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4 INITIAL 682XXB/683XXB CHECKOUT . . . . . . . 5-4
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Resetting the Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warmup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-5 CW FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-6 POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS
TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure . . . . . . 5-14
Power Level Flatness Test Procedure . . . . . . 5-15

Chapter 6 - Operator Maintenance

6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-2 ERROR AND WARNING/STATUS MESSAGES. . . 6-3
Self-Test Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Normal Operation Error and Warning/
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

iv 682XXB/683XXB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
6-3 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning the Fan Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning the Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Replacing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 7 - Use With Other Instruments

7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7-2 MASTER-SLAVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Connecting the 68XXXBs . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Initiating Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . 7-5
Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Master-Slave Operation in VNA Mode . . . . . . 7-7
Terminating Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3 USE WITH A 562 SCALAR NETWORK
ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 562 . . . 7-10
7-4 USE WITH A 360B VECTOR NETWORK
ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 360B . . 7-11
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-5 USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK
ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 8003 . . 7-16
Setting Up the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . . 7-17
Initiating 8003 SNA Operation . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-6 USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK
ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the HP8757D 7-20
Setting up the 682XXB/683XXB. . . . . . . . . 7-21
Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation . . . . . . . 7-23

Appendix A - Rear Panel Connectors

A-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A-2 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

682XXB/683XXB OM v
Table of Contents (Continued)

A-3 CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . A-1

Appendix B - Performance Specifications

B-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Series 682XXB - Synthesized Signal Generator
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Series 683XXB - Synthesized Signal Generator
Performance Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

vi 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Chapter 1
General Information
Table of Contents

1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-3 DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-6 RELATED MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
GPIB Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
SCPI Programming Manual . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Maintenance Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-8 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . 1-10
1-9 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT . . . . . . 1-11
Figure 1-1. Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator
 Chapter 1
General Information
1-1 SCOPE OF MANUAL This manual provides general information, installation, and operating
information for the ANRITSU Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized
Signal Generators. (Throughout this manual, the terms 682XXB/
683XXB and signal generator will be used interchangeably to refer to
the instruments.) Manual organization is shown in the table of con-
tents.

1-2 INTRODUCTION This chapter contains general information about the series 682XXB/
683XXB signal generators. It includes a general description of the in-
struments and information on their identification number, related
manuals, options, and performance specifications. A listing of recom-
mended test equipment is also provided.

1-3 DESCRIPTION The Series 682XXB Synthesized Signal Generator and the Series
683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator are microprocessor-based,
synthesized signal sources with high resolution phase-lock capability.
They generate both discrete CW frequencies and broad (full range)
and narrow band sweeps across the frequency range of 10 MHz to
65 GHz. All functions of the signal generators are fully controllable lo-
cally from the front panel or remotely (except for power on/standby)
via the IEEE-488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB).

The Series 682XXB Synthesized Signal Generator and the Series

683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator each presently consist of 15
models covering a variety of frequency and power ranges. Table 1-1,
pages 1-4 and 1-5, lists series 682XXB models, frequency ranges, and
maximum leveled output; Table 1-2, pages 1-6 and 1-7, lists series
683XXB models, frequency ranges, and maximum leveled output.

682XXB/683XXB OM 1-3
GENERAL 682XXB
INFORMATION MODELS

Table 1-1. Series 682XXB Models (1 of 2)

682XXB Frequency Output Power

Output Power
Model (GHz) w/Step Attenuator

68237B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm

68245B 0.5 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68247B 0.01 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
68253B
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68255B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68259B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
68263B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68265B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68269B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68275B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.5 dBm –1.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68277B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.5 dBm –1.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68285B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –1.5 dBm
50.0 – 60.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –2.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68287B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –1.5 dBm
50.0 – 60.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –2.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm
68295B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm Not Available
40.0 – 50.0 GHz 0.0 dBm
50.0 – 65.0 GHz –2.0 dBm

1-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
GENERAL 682XXB
INFORMATION MODELS

Table 1-1. Series 682XXB Models (2 of 2)

682XXB Frequency Output Power
Output Power
Model (GHz) w/Step Attenuator

0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm

2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm
68297B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm Not Available
40.0 – 50.0 GHz 0.0 dBm
50.0 – 65.0 GHz –2.0 dBm

With Option 15B (High Power) Installed

68237B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68245B
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68247B
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68253B
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68255B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68259B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68263B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68265B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68269B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
68275B 0.5 – 50.0 GHz Standard Standard
68277B 0.01 – 50.0 GHz Standard Standard
68285B 0.5 – 60.0 GHz Standard Standard
68287B 0.01 – 60.0 GHz Standard Standard
68295B 0.5 – 65.0 GHz Standard Not Available
68297B 0.01 – 65.0 GHz Standard Not Available

682XXB/683XXB OM 1-5
GENERAL 683XXB
INFORMATION MODELS

Table 1-2. Series 683XXB Models (1 of 2)

683XXB Frequency Output Power

Output Power
Model (GHz) w/Step Attenuator

68337B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm

68345B 0.5 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68347B 0.01 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
68353B
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68355B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68359B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.5 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
68363B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68365B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68369B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +9.0 dBm +7.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68375B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.5 dBm –1.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68377B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.5 dBm –1.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68385B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –1.5 dBm
50.0 – 60.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –2.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm +10.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm +8.5 dBm
68387B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm 0.0 dBm
40.0 – 50.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –1.5 dBm
50.0 – 60.0 GHz +2.0 dBm –2.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +11.0 dBm
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm
68395B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm Not Available
40.0 – 50.0 GHz 0.0 dBm
50.0 – 65.0 GHz –2.0 dBm

1-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
GENERAL 683XXB
INFORMATION MODELS

Table 1-2. Series 683XXB Models (2 of 2)

683XXB Frequency Output Power

Output Power
Model (GHz) w/Step Attenuator

0.01 – 2.0 GHz +12.0 dBm

2.0 – 20.0 GHz +10.0 dBm
68397B 20.0 – 40.0 GHz +2.5 dBm Not Available
40.0 – 50.0 GHz 0.0 dBm
50.0 – 65.0 GHz –2.0 dBm

With Option 15B (High Power) Installed

68337B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68345B
2.2 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68347B
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +17.0 dBm +15.0 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68353B
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68355B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68359B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 26.5 GHz +10.0 dBm +7.5 dBm
2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68363B
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.5 – 2.2 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68365B 2.2 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
0.01 – 2.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
68369B 2.0 – 20.0 GHz +13.0 dBm +11.0 dBm
20.0 – 40.0 GHz +6.0 dBm +3.0 dBm
68375B 0.5 – 50.0 GHz Standard Standard
68377B 0.01 – 50.0 GHz Standard Standard
68385B 0.5 – 60.0 GHz Standard Standard
68387B 0.01 – 60.0 GHz Standard Standard
68395B 0.5 – 65.0 GHz Standard Not Available
68397B 0.01 – 65.0 GHz Standard Not Available

682XXB/683XXB OM 1-7
GENERAL IDENTIFICATION
INFORMATION NUMBER

1-4 IDENTIFICATION All ANRITSU instruments are assigned a unique six-digit ID number,
NUMBER such as “402001.” The ID number is imprinted on a decal that is
affixed to the rear panel of the unit. Special-order instrument configu-
rations also have an additional special serial number tag attached to
the rear panel of the unit.

When ordering parts or corresponding with ANRITSU Customer Serv-

ice, please use the correct serial number with reference to the specific
instrument’s model number (i.e., Model 68347B Synthesized Signal
Generator, Serial No. 402001).

1-5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL This manual is available on CD ROM as an Adobe Acrobat Portable
Document Format (*.pdf) file. The file can be viewed using Acrobat
Reader, a free program that is also included on the CD ROM. The file
is “linked” such that the viewer can choose a topic to view from the
displayed “bookmark” list and “jump” to the manual page on which the
topic resides. The text can also be word-searched. Contact ANRITSU
Customer Service for price and availability.

1-6 RELATED MANUALS This is one of a four manual set that consists of an Operation Manual,
a GPIB Programming Manual, a SCPI Programming Manual, and a
Maintenance Manual.

GPIB Pro- This manual provides information for remote opera-

gramming tion of the signal generator with Product Specific
Manual commands sent from an external controller via the
IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). It
contains a general description of the GPIB and bus
data transfer and control functions, a complete list-
ing and description of all 682XXB/683XXB GPIB
Product Specific commands, and several program-
ming examples. The ANRITSU part number for the
GPIB Programming Manual is 10370-10286.

SCPI Pro- This manual provides information for remote opera-

gramming tion of the signal generator with Standard Com-
Manual mands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI)
commands sent from an external controller via the
IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). It
contains a general description of the GPIB and bus
data transfer and control functions, a complete list-
ing and description of each command in the
682XXB/683XXB SCPI command set, and examples
of command usage. The ANRITSU part number for
the SCPI Programming Manual is 10370-10288.

1-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
GENERAL
INFORMATION OPTIONS

Maintenance The Maintenance Manual supplies service informa-

Manual tion for all models in the 682XXB/683XXB series.
The service information includes functional circuit
descriptions, block diagrams, performance verifica-
tion tests, calibration procedures, troubleshooting
data, and assembly and component removal/replace-
ment procedures. The ANRITSU part number for
the Maintenance Manual is 10370-10290.

1-7 OPTIONS The following options are available.

Option 1, Rack Mounting. Rack mount kit containing a set of

track slides (90° tilt capability), mounting ears, and front panel han-
dles for mounting the instrument in a standard 19-inch equipment
rack.
Option 2A, 110 dB Step Attenuator. Adds a 10 dB per step
attenuator with a 110 dB range for models having a high-end fre-
quency of £26.5 GHz. Output power is selected directly in dBm on
the front panel (or via GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 2B, 110 dB Step Attenuator. Adds a 10 dB per step
attenuator with a 110 dB range for models having a high-end fre-
quency of £40 GHz. Output power is selected directly in dBm on the
front panel (or via GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 2C, 90 dB Step Attenuator. Adds a 10 dB per step
attenuator with a 90 dB range for models having a high-end fre-
quency of £50 GHz. Output power is selected directly in dBm on the
front panel (or via GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 2D, 90 dB Step Attenuator. Adds a 10 dB per step
attenuator with a 90 dB range for modes having a high-end fre-
quency of £60 GHz. Output power is selected directly in dBm on the
front panel (or via GPIB). Rated RF output power is reduced.
Option 6, Phase Modulation (FM). Adds phase modulation capa-
bility. The internal FM generator becomes the FM/FM generator.
(Not available in combination with Option 7.)
Option 7, Delete AM/FM Generator. Deletes the internal AM and
FM generators. External AM and FM capability remains un-
changed. (Not available in combination with Options 6, 8, or 20.)
Option 8, Internal Power Meter. Adds an internal power meter
that is compatible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, or 6400-71 series
detectors. (Not available in combination with Option 7.)
Option 9, Rear Panel RF Output. Moves the RF output connector
to the rear panel.

682XXB/683XXB OM 1-9
GENERAL PERFORMANCE
INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS

Option 10, Complex Modulation Capability. Provides user-

defined waveform capability for complex modulation. Requires a
computer/controller (not included). Includes cable and Windows
based software. (Not available in combination with Option 7.)
Option 11, 0.1 Hz Frequency Resolution. Provides frequency
resolution of 0.1 Hz.
Option 14, ANRITSU 360B VNA Compatibility. Modifies rack
mounting hardware to mate unit in a ANRITSU 360B VNA console.
Option 15B, High Power Output. Adds high-power RF compo-
nents to the instrument providing increased RF output power in the
2–26.5 GHz frequency range. Option 15B is standard in models hav-
ing a high-end frequency that is >40 GHz.
Option 16, High-Stability Time Base. Adds an ovenized, 10 MHz
crystal oscillator with <5 x 10–10/day frequency stability.
Option 17A, No Front Panel. Deletes the front panel for use in re-
mote control applications where a front panel display or keyboard
control are not needed.
Option 18, mmWave Module Bias Output. Provides bias output
for 54000-xWRxx Millimeter Wave Source Modules. BNC Twinax
connector, rear panel. (Not available in combination with Option
20.)
Option 19, SCPI Programmability. Adds GPIB command mne-
monics complying with Standard Commands for Programmable In-
struments (SCPI), Version 1993.0. SCPI programming complies with
IEEE 488.2-1987.
Option 20, SCAN Modulator. Adds an internal SCAN modulator
for simulating high-depth amplitude modulated signals in models
68237B/68337B, 68245B/68345B, and 68247B/68347B only. Re-
quires an external modulating signal. (Not available in combination
with Option 7 or 18.)

1-8 PERFORMANCE Series 682XXB Synthesized Signal Generator and Series 683XXB Syn-
SPECIFICATIONS thesized Signal Generator performance specifications are provided in
Appendix B.

1-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
GENERAL RECOMMENDED
INFORMATION TEST EQUIPMENT

1-9 RECOMMENDED TEST Table 1-3 lists the recommended test equipment for performing the Se-
EQUIPMENT ries 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator operation verifica-
tion tests in Chapter 5.

Table 1-3. Recommended Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specification Recommended Manufacturer/Model

Frequency Range: 0.01 to 65 GHz EIP Microwave, Inc. Models 538B,

Counter, Input Z: 50W 548B, or 578B,
with Resolution: 1 Hz with
Cable Kit Other: External Time Base Cable Kit: Option 590
and Input and
External Mixer External Mixer:
Option 91 (26.5 to 40 GHz)
Option 92 (40 to 60 GHz)
Option 93 (60 to 90 GHz)

Power Meter, Range: –30 to +20 dBm Hewlett-Packard Model 437B,

with (1mW to 100 mW) with
Power Power Sensor:
Sensor HP 8487A (0.05 to 50 GHz)

Oscilloscope Bandwidth: DC to 150 MHz Tektronix, Inc. Model TAS485

Vertical Sensitivity: 2 mV/
division
Horiz Sensitivity: 50 ns/ di-
vision

Adapter K (male) to 2.4 mm (fe- Hewlett-Packard

male) Part Number: HP 11904D
Adapts the Power Sensor,
HP 8487A, to the 682XXB/
683XXB RF OUTPUT con-
nector (£40 GHz models)

682XXB/683XXB OM 1-11/1-12
 Chapter 2
Installation

Table of Contents

2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Line Voltage Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Standby Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Warmup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION . . . . . 2-7
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
GPIB Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Setting the GPIB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Selecting the Line Terminator . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Selecting the Interface Language. . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-5 RACK MOUNTING KIT INSTALLATION . . . . . 2-10
Preliminary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-6 PREPARATION FOR STORAGE/SHIPMENT . . . 2-13
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
 Chapter 2
Installation
2-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides installation instructions for the Series 682XXB/
683XXB Synthesized Signal Generators. It includes information on
initial inspection, preparation for use, storage, and reshipment, and
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) setup and interconnections.

WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or
use an equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this
equipment is lifted by one person.

2-2 INITIAL INSPECTION Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the shipping container or
cushioning material is damaged, retain until the contents of the ship-
ment have been checked against the packing list and the signal gen-
erator has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation.

If the shipment is incomplete or if the signal generator is damaged

mechanically or electrically, notify your local sales representative or
ANRITSU Customer Service. If either the shipping container is dam-
aged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress, notify the car-
rier as well as ANRITSU. Keep the shipping materials for the carrier’s
inspection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-3
 PREPARATION
INSTALLATION FOR USE

2-3 PREPARATION FOR USE Preparation for use consists of checking that the rear panel line volt-
age selector switch is set for the correct line voltage and connecting
the signal generator to the power source. The following paragraphs
provide these procedures along with information about power require-
ments, warmup times, and the operating environment.

Power The signal generator accepts 90 to 132 Vac and 180

Requirements to 264 Vac, 48 to 400 Hz, single-phase power. Power
consumption is 400 VA maximum. The signal gen-
erator is intended for Installation Category (Over-
voltage Category) II.
CAUTION .
Before applying power, verify that the unit is set to match
the available line voltage and that the installed fuse is of
the correct type and rating.

Line Voltage The line voltage selector switch on the rear panel
Selection can be set for either 110 Vac or 220 Vac operation
(Figure 2-1). When the switch is set to 110 Vac, the
682XXB/683XXB accepts 90 to 132 Vac line voltage.
When the switch is set to 220 Vac, the 682XXB/
683XXB accepts 180 to 264 Vac line voltage. If the
selector setting is incorrect for the line voltage avail-
able, change it to the correct setting.

Whenever the selector setting is changed, the line

fuse must be changed to the correct value for the
line voltage selected. Line fuse values for the line
voltages are printed on the rear panel next to the
fuse holder.
WARNING .
When supplying power to this equipment, always use a
three-wire power cable connected to a three-wire power line
outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equip-
ment in this manner, there is a risk of receiving a severe or
fatal electric shock.

Power Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to line power auto-

Connection matically places it in operation (front panel OPER-
ATE LED on). To connect it to the power source, plug
the female end of the power cable into the input line
voltage receptacle on the rear panel (Figure 2-1).
Then plug the male end of the power cord into a
three-wire power line outlet.

2-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
 PREPARATION
INSTALLATION FOR USE

Line
Fuse

Line Voltage
Selector Switch

GPIB
Connector

Figure 2-1. Signal Generator Rear Panel showing Power Connection

Standby Whenever the signal generator is not being used it

LEVEL
Operation should be left connected to the power source and
CONTROL
placed in standby. This keeps the internal timebase
MODULATION frequency reference at operating temperature.
SYSTEM
On the front panel, press LINE to switch the
OPERATE
682XXB/683XXB from OPERATE (green LED on) to
LINE
STANDBY (orange LED on).
STANDBY

NOTE
During standby operation, the fan runs
continuously.
Line
Key

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-5
 PREPARATION
INSTALLATION FOR USE

Warmup Time From a cold start (ac power application), the signal
generator requires approximately 120 hours (5 days)
of warm up to achieve 2 x 10–8/day frequency accu-
racy and stability.

If the Option 16 time base is installed, the 682XXB/

683XXB requires approximately 120 hours (5 days)
of warm up to achieve 5 x 10–10/day frequency accu-
racy and stability. Instruments disconnected from
AC power for more than 72 hours require 30 days to
return to specified aging.

When placing the 682XXB/683XXB in operation

from stand-by, allow 30 minutes warmup to assure
stable operation.

Operating The 682XXB/683XXB can be operated within the fol-

Environment lowing environmental limits.

q Temperature. 0°C to 50°C (-32°F to 122°F).

q Humidity. 5 to 95% relative at 40°C.
q Altitude. up to 4600 meters (approximately
15,000 feet).
q Cooling. Internal cooling is provided by forced
airflow from the fan mounted on the rear
panel.

CAUTION
Before installing the 682XXB/683XXB in its operating envi-
ronment, ensure that all airflow passages at the sides and
rear of the instrument are clear. This is of particular impor-
tance whenever the unit is being rack-mounted.

Keep the cooling fan filter clean so that the ventilation holes
are not obstructed. A blocked fan filter can cause the instru-
ment to overheat and shut down.

2-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
 GPIB SETUP AND
INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTION

2-4 GPIB SETUP AND The 682XXB/683XXB provides automated microwave signal genera-
INTERCONNECTION tion via the GPIB. The following paragraphs provide information
about interface connections, cable requirements, setting the GPIB op-
erating parameters, and selecting the external interface language.

Interface Interface between the signal generator and other de-

Connector vices on the GPIB is via a 24-wire interface cable.
This cable uses connector shells having two connec-
tor faces. These double-faced connectors allow for
the parallel connection of two or more cables to a
single device. Figure 2-1 shows the location of the
rear panel GPIB connector.

Cable Length The GPIB can accommodate up to 15 instruments at

Restrictions any one time. To achieve design performance on the
bus, proper timing and voltage level relationships
must be maintained. If either the cable length be-
tween separate instruments or the cumulative cable
length between all instruments is too long, the data
and control lines cannot be driven properly and the
system may fail to perform. Cable length restric-
tions are as follows:

q No more than 15 instruments may be installed

on the bus.
q Total cumulative cable length in meters may
not exceed two times the number of bus instru-
ments or 20 meters—whichever is less.

NOTE
For low EMI applications, the GPIB cable
should be a fully shielded type, with
well-grounded metal-shell connectors

GPIB Inter- The only interconnection required for GPIB opera-

connection tion is between the signal generator and the control-
ler. This interconnection is via a standard GPIB
cable. The ANRITSU Part number for such a cable
is 2000-1, -2, or -4 (1, 2, or 4 meters in length).

Setting the The default GPIB address is 5. If a different GPIB

GPIB Address address is desired, it can be set from the front panel
using the Configure GPIB Menu.

To change the GPIB address, first press the front

panel main menu key labeled SYSTEM . The Sys-
tem Menu (shown on the following page) is dis-
played.

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-7
 GPIB SETUP AND
INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTION

Now press the menu soft-key Config . The System

Configuration Menu (below) is displayed.

To go to the Configure GPIB menu from this menu,

press the menu soft-key GPIB . The Configure GPIB
Menu (below) is displayed.

Press the menu soft-key GPIB Address to change

the current GPIB address of the signal generator.
Enter a new address using the cursor control key or
the data entry keypad and the terminator key

Hz
ns
ADRS

The new GPIB address will now appear on the dis-

play. The entry must be between 1 and 30 to be rec-
ognized as a valid GPIB address.

2-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
 GPIB SETUP AND
INSTALLATION INTERCONNECTION

Selecting the Data is delimited on the GPIB by either the carriage

Line return (CR) ASCII character or both the carriage re-
Terminator turn and line feed (CR/LF) ASCII characters. Which
character is used depends upon the requirements of
the system controller. Most modern controllers can
use either CR or CR/LF, while many older control-
lers require one or the other. Consult the controller’s
manual for its particular requirements.

From the Configure GPIB Menu display, you can se-

lect which GPIB terminator to use by pressing the
menu soft-key Line Term . This menu soft-key tog-
gles the GPIB terminator between CR and CR/LF.
The current selection appears on the display.

Selecting the Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Genera-

Interface tors can be remotely operated via the GPIB using
Language one of two external interface languages—Native or
SCPI (Option 19). The Native interface language
uses a set of 682XXB/683XXB GPIB Product Spe-
cific commands to control the instrument; the SCPI
interface language uses a set of the Standard Com-
mands for Programmable Instruments commands to
control the unit.

The Configure GPIB Menu has additional menu dis-

plays. For instruments with Option 19, selection of
which external interface language is to be used is
made from the first additional menu. From the Con-
figure GPIB Menu display, you can access the first
additional menu by pressing More . The First Addi-
tional Configure GPIB Menu (below) is displayed.

Press Native/SCPI to select the external interface

language to be used. This menu soft-key toggles the
language selection between Native and SCPI. The
current selection appears on the display.

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-9
 RACK MOUNTING KIT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

2-5 RACK MOUNTING KIT The rack mounting kit (Option 1) contains a set of track slides (90° tilt
INSTALLATION capability), mounting ears, and front panel handles for mounting the
signal generator in a standard 19-inch equipment rack. The following
procedure provides instructions for installing the rack mounting hard-
ware on the instrument. Refer to Figure 2-2 and 2-3 during this proce-
dure.

Preliminary Disconnect the power cord and any other cables

from the instrument.

Procedure Install the rack mounting hardware as follows:

Step 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the

screws and the front handle assemblies
from the instrument. (For instruments
not having front handles, remove the
screws and the front top and bottom feet
from the instrument.) Retain the screws.

Step 2 Remove the four feet from the rear of the

instrument. Retain the screws.

Step 3 Remove the screws and the carrying han-

dle from the side handle cover. (The two
screws fastening the carrying handle
through the side handle cover to the chas-
sis are accessable by lifting up the rubber
covering at each end of the handle.)

Figure 2-2. Front Handle, Feet, and Carrying Handle Removal

2-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
 RACK MOUNTING KIT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Step 4 Remove the inner slide assemblies from

the outer slide assemblies.

Step 5 Place the left side inner slide assembly

onto the instrument case with the handle
NOTE
towards the front of the instrument (Fig-
The screws with green heads have ure 2-3).
metric threads. When it becomes
necessary to replace any of these Step 6 Insert two green-headed screws through
screws, always use the exact re- the holes in the slide assembly behind the
placement green-headed screws handle and into the metric tapped holes
(ANRITSU P/N 2000-560) to avoid in the side of the instrument.
damage to the instrument.
Step 7 Insert two green-headed screws through
the holes near the rear of the slide assem-
bly and into the metric tapped holes in
the side of the instrument.

Step 8 Insert the two SAE threaded screws (re-

moved from the feet) through the 90° tabs
on the rear of the slide assembly and into
the rear panel of the instrument.

Step 9 Using the Phillips screwdriver, tighten all

screws holding the left side slide assem-
bly to the instrument chassis.

Figure 2-3. Rack Mounting Hardware Installation

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-11
 RACK MOUNTING KIT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

Step 10 Place the right side inner slide assembly

onto the instrument case with the handle
towards the front of the instrument.

Step 11 Insert two green-headed screws through

the holes in the slide assembly behind the
handle and into the metric tapped holes
in the side of the instrument.

Step 12 Insert two green-headed screws through

the holes near the rear of the slide assem-
bly and into the metric tapped holes in
the side of the instrument.

Step 13 Insert the two SAE threaded screws (re-

moved from the feet) through the 90° tabs
on the rear of the slide assembly and into
the rear panel of the instrument.

Step 14 Using a Phillips screwdriver, tighten all

screws holding the right side slide assem-
bly to the instrument chassis.

Step 15 With the appropriate hardware, install

the outer slide assemblies onto the equip-
ment rack.

Step 16 Lift the signal generator into position.

Align the inner and outer slide assem-
blies and slide the instrument into the
rack. Realign the hardware as needed for
smooth operation.

WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or
use an equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this
equipment is lifted by one person.

2-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
 PREPARATION FOR
INSTALLATION STORAGE/SHIPMENT

2-6 PREPARATION FOR The following paragraphs give instructions for preparing the 682XXB/
STORAGE/SHIPMENT 683XXB for storage or shipment.

Preparation Preparing the signal generator for storage consists

for Storage of cleaning the unit, packing the inside with
moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals, and storing
the unit in a temperature environment that is main-
tained between –40°C and +75°C (–40°F to +167°F).

Preparation To provide maximum protection against damage in

for Shipment transit, the signal generator should be repackaged
in the original shipping container. If this container
is no longer available and the unit is being returned
to ANRITSU for repair, advise ANRITSU Customer
Service; they will send a new shipping container
free of charge. In the event neither of these two op-
tions is possible, instructions for packaging and
shipment are given below.

Use a Suitable Container.

Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 275-
pound test strength. This carton should have inside
dimensions of no less than six inches larger than the
unit dimensions to allow for cushioning.

Protect the Instrument.

Surround the unit with polyethylene sheeting to
protect the finish.

Cushion the Instrument.

Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly pack-
ing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton
and the unit. Provide at least three inches of dun-
nage on all sides.

Seal the Container.

Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an
industrial stapler.

Address the Container.

If the instrument is being returned to ANRITSU for
service, mark the address of the appropriate
ANRITSU service center (Table 2-1) and your return
address on the carton in one or more prominent lo-
cations.

682XXB/683XXB OM 2-13
 ANRITSU
INSTALLATION SERVICE CENTERS

Table 2-1. ANRITSU Service Centers

UNITED STATES FRANCE KOREA

ANRITSU COMPANY ANRITSU S.A ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD.
685 Jarvis Drive 9 Avenue du Quebec #901 Daeo Bldg. 26-5
Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809 Zone de Courtaboeuf Yeoido Dong, Youngdeungpo
Telephone: (408) 776-8300 91951 Les Ulis Cedex Seoul Korea 150 010
FAX: 408-776-1744 Telephone: 016-44-66-546 Telephone: 02-782-7156
FAX: 016-44-61-065 FAX: 02-782-4590
ANRITSU COMPANY
10 New Maple Ave., Unit 3 GERMANY SINGAPORE
Pine Brook, NJ 07058 ANRITSU GmbH ANRITSU (SINGAPORE) PTE LTD
Telephone: (201) 227-8999 Grafenberger Allee 54-56 3 Shenton Way #24-03
FAX: 201-575-0092 D-40237 Dusseldorf Shenton House
Germany Singapore 0106
ANRITSU COMPANY Telephone: 0211-68550 Telephone: 022-65-206
1155 E. Collins Blvd FAX: 0211-685555 FAX: 022-65-207
Richardson, TX 75081
Telephone: 1-800-ANRITSU INDIA SOUTH AFRICA
FAX: 972-67d1-1877 MEERA AGENCIES (P) LTD. ETESCSA
A-23 Hauz Khas 12 Surrey Square Office Park
AUSTRALIA New Delhi 110 016 330 Surrey Avenue
ANRITSU PTY. LTD. Telephone: 011-685-3959 Ferndale, Randburt, 2194
Unit 3, 170 Foster Road FAX: 011-686-6720 South Africa
Mt Waverley, VIC 3149 Telephone: 011-27-11-787-7200
Australia ISRAEL Fax: 011-27-11-787-0446
Telephone: 03-9558-8177 TECH-CENT, LTD
Fax: 03-9558-8255 Haarad St. No. 7, Ramat Haahayal SWEDEN
Tel-Aviv 69701 ANRITSU AB
BRAZIL Telephone: (03) 64-78-563 Botvid Center
ANRITSU ELECTRONICA LTDA. FAX: (03) 64-78-334 S-15 85
Praia de Botafogo 440,Sala 2401 Stockholm, Sweden
CEP22250-040, Rio de Janeiro, RJ, ITALY Telephone: (08) 534-717-00
Brasil ANRITSU Sp.A FAX: (08) 534-717-30
Telephone: 021-28-69-141 Rome Office
Fax: 021-53-71-456 Via E. Vittorini, 129 TAIWAN
00144 Roma EUR ANRITSU CO., LTD.
CANADA Telephone: (06) 50-22-666 8F, No. 96, Section 3
ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD. FAX: (06) 50-22-4252 Chien Kuo N. Road
215 Stafford Road, Unit 102 Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
Nepean, Ontario K2H 9C1 JAPAN Telephone: (02) 515-6050
Telephone: (613) 828-4090 ANRITSU CORPORATION FAX: (02) 509-5519
FAX: (613) 828-5400 1800 Onna Atsugi-shi
Kanagawa-Prf. 243 Japan UNITED KINGDOM
CHINA Telephone: 0462-23-1111 ANRITSU LTD.
INSTRIMPEX ANRITSU PRODUCT FAX: 0462-25-8379 200 Capability Green
SERVICE STATION Luton, Bedfordshire
NO. 1515 LU1 3LU, England
Beijing Fortune Building Telephone: 015-82-41-88-53
5 Dong San Huan Bei Lu FAX: 015-82-31-303
Chao Yang-qu
Beijing, China
Telephone: 10-6590-9230
FAX: 10-6590-9235

2-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Chapter 3
Local (Front Panel) Operation

Table of Contents

3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3-2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Line Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Data Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Data Entry Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
RF Output Control Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3 DATA DISPLAY AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Menu Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4 DATA ENTRY AREA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
3-5 INSTRUMENT START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Powering Up the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . 3-14
Start-Up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Standby Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Self-Testing the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . . 3-15
Resetting to Default Parameters . . . . . . . . 3-15
3-6 ENTERING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Opening the Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Editing the Current Value . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Entering a New Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Table of Contents (Continued)

3-7 CW FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Selecting CW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting a CWFrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
CW Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-8 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION . . . . . . . . 3-25
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode. . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Setting the Analog Sweep Time . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Selecting a Sweep Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Selecting Step Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Setting Step Size and Dwell Time . . . . . . . . 3-29
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Selecting a Sweep Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Frequency Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-9 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION . . . . . . . 3-39
Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode . . . . . . . 3-39
Selecting a Power Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Level Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-10 POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION. . . . . . . 3-43
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . 3-43
Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and
Dwell Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Selecting a CW Power Sweep Trigger . . . . . . 3-45
Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range. . . . . . 3-46
Selecting a Sweep Frequency / Step Power Mode 3-48
Setting Power Level Step Size . . . . . . . . . 3-49
3-11 LEVELING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Selecting a Leveling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Attenuator Decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
ALC Power Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
User Cal (User Level Flatness Correction) . . . 3-57

3-2 682XXB/683XXB OM
Table of Contents (Continued)
3-12 SIGNAL MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes . . . . 3-63
Providing Amplitude Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-63
Frequency Modulation Operating Modes . . . . 3-68
Providing Frequency Modulation . . . . . . . . 3-68
Phase Modulation Operating Modes. . . . . . . 3-73
Providing Phase Modulation . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Pulse Modulation Operating Modes . . . . . . . 3-77
Providing Pulse Modulation. . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3-13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
Configuring the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Configuring the Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
Configuring the RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Configuring the GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Setting Increment Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3-14 SAVING/RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS . 3-95
Saving Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Recalling Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
Erasing Stored Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3-15 SECURE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
3-16 SCAN MODULATION (OPTION 20) . . . . . . . . 3-98
3-17 INTERNAL POWER METER (OPTION 8) . . . . . 3-99
3-18 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION . . 3-100

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-3/3-4
 Chapter 3
Local (Front Panel) Operation
3-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information and instructions on operating the
Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generators using the front
panel controls. It contains the following:

q Illustrations and diagrams of the front panel, data display area,

and data entry area that identify and describe all front panel
controls, inputs, and outputs.
q An annotated diagram of the menu display format showing
where the current frequency, power, and modulation information
is displayed.
q Instructions for performing signal generator operations; namely,
frequency and frequency sweep, power level and power sweep,
signal modulation, system configuration, and saving and recall-
ing instrument setups.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-5
LOCAL (FRONT FRONT PANEL
PANEL) OPERATION LAYOUT

3-2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT The 682XXB/683XXB front panel is divided into two main areas—the
data display area and the data entry area. The following paragraphs
provide a brief description of the front panel controls, inputs, outputs,
and data display and data entry areas as shown in Figure 3-1. De-
tailed descriptions of the data display and data entry areas are con-
tained in paragraphs 3-3 and 3-4.

Figure 3-1. Front Panel, 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator

Line Key The line key provides for turning the signal genera-
tor on and off. STANDBY (off) is indicated by an or-
ange LED; OPERATE (on) by a green LED.

Data Display The data display area consists of the data display
Area and the surrounding menu keys.

Data Display
The data display provides information about the
current status of the 682XXB/683XXB in a menu
display format. This includes the operating mode of
the instrument, the value of the active frequency
and power level parameters, and the modulation
status.

Menu Keys
Menu keys provide for selecting the operating mode,
parameters, and configuration of the signal genera-
tor.

3-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT FRONT PANEL
PANEL) OPERATION LAYOUT

Data Entry The data entry area consists of data entry keys and
Area controls that provide for (1) changing values for
each 682XXB/683XXB parameter, and (2) terminat-
ing the value entry and assigning the appropriate
units (GHz, MHz, dBm, etc.).

RF Output The RF output control key provides for turning the

Control Key RF output power on and off. OUTPUT OFF is indi-
cated by a red LED; OUTPUT ON by a yellow LED.

Connectors The front panel has both input and output connec-
tors.

Modulation Connectors
The modulation connectors provide for applying ex-
ternal AM, FM, or Pulse modulation to the RF out-
put signal.

External ALC Connector

The external ALC connector provides for leveling
the RF output signal externally using either a detec-
tor or a power meter.

RF Output Connector
The RF output connector provides RF output from a
50W source.

NOTE
To prevent power losses due to an imped-
ance mismatch, the mating connector and
cable should also be rated at 50W.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-7
LOCAL (FRONT DATA DISPLAY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

3-3 DATA DISPLAY AREA The data display area consists of the data display and the surrounding
menu keys. The data display is a dot matrix liquid crystal display
(LCD) that provides 16 lines of 40 characters each. Information is pre-
sented on the LCD in the form of menu displays. The menu keys ei-
ther select the main menu to be displayed, select a sub-menu of the
current menu display, or control a function on the current menu dis-
play.

Figure 3-2 shows the format of the menu display and identifies the
display elements. It also shows the placement of the menu keys in re-
lation to the display. The paragraphs that follow provide descriptions
of the menu display elements and the menu keys.

Frequency Frequency Level Menu

Main Menu Main Menu Mode Parameters Level Mode Parameters Labels Menu
Keys Key Cursor Title Bar Area Title Bar Area Side Keys Soft-Keys

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
Modulation
LEVEL Title Bars
CONTROL

MODULATION

SYSTEM

Modulation Menu Menu Labels

Status Areas Soft-Keys Bottom Keys

Figure 3-2. Front Panel Data Display Area

3-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT DATA DISPLAY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

Menu Display The menu display is divided into specific areas that
Format show the frequency, power level, and modulation in-
formation for the current instrument setup. Menu
labels for the current menu’s soft-keys appear along
the bottom and right side of the display.

Title Bars
A shaded title bar identifies each parameter area.
Mode information is displayed in reverse video on
the title bars.
q Frequency Mode Title Bar—The current
frequency mode (CW, Analog Sweep, Step
Sweep, or Manual Sweep) appears on the left
side of the bar. In an analog or step sweep
mode, the type of sweep trigger (Auto, Exter-
nal, or Single) appears on the right side.
q Level Mode Title Bar—The current power
level mode (Level or Level Sweep) appears on
the left side of the bar. In a level sweep mode,
the type of sweep trigger (Auto, External, or
Single) appears on the right side of the bar.
q Modulation Title Bars—Each type of signal
modulation (AM, FM/FM, and Pulse) has a
separate title bar on the display.

Parameter Areas
The parameter areas show the frequency, power
level, and modulation information for the current
682XXB/683XXB setup.
q Frequency Parameters Area—The current
CW frequency in GHz, or the start and stop
frequencies of the current frequency sweep
range in GHz are displayed in this area.
q Power Level Parameters Area—The cur-
rent power level in dBm, or the start and stop
levels of the current power level sweep range
in dBm are displayed in this area.
q Modulation Status Areas—These areas dis-
play Int, Ext, or Off to indicate the status of
signal modulation for the current setup.

Menu Labels
Each of the menu soft-keys, located below and to the
right of the display, has a corresponding menu label
area on the display. These labels identify the func-
tion of the soft-keys for the current menu display. In
most cases, when a soft-key is pressed, its menu la-
bel changes appearance to visually show the On/Off
condition.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-9
LOCAL (FRONT DATA DISPLAY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

Window Display
A window display that overlays a portion of the cur-
rent menu display is used to (1) show the parameter
being edited; (2) display selection lists of preset fre-
quencies, power levels, markers, etc.; (3) show the
modulation and system configuration choices and
current selections; or (4) show self-test error mes-
sages. A typical window display is shown on the left.

Menu Keys As shown in Figure 3-2, there are two types of menu
keys that surround the data display—main menu
keys and menu soft-keys. The main menu keys are
positioned to the left of the data display. The menu
soft-keys are located at the bottom and to the right
of the data display.

Main Menu Keys

Each of the main menu keys, shown on the left, se-
lects a main (top-level) menu display. These menus
let you select the operating mode, operating pa-
rameters, and configuration of the instrument. A
CW/SWEEP
SELECT brief functional description of each main menu fol-
lows.
FREQUENCY
CONTROL q CW/SWEEP SELECT—This menu lets you
LEVEL/ALC select between CW, Analog, Step, and Manual
SELECT Sweep frequency modes.
LEVEL q FREQUENCY CONTROL—In CW frequency
CONTROL mode, this menu lets you select the CW fre-
quency parameter (F0-F9 or M0-M9) to use. In
MODULATION
the Analog, Step, or Manual Sweep frequency
mode, this menu lets you select the sweep
SYSTEM
range parameters (Full, F1-F2, F3-F4, F5-dF,
or F6-dF) to use. In Analog or Step Sweep fre-
quency mode, the menu also lets you select up
to 20 independent, pre-settable frequency
markers.
q LEVEL/ALC SELECT—This menu lets you
select power level and ALC modes (Level,
Level Sweep, Level Offset, ALC on or off, inter-
nal or external ALC, ALC/attenuator decou-
pling, ALC slope, and user level flatness cor-
rection).
q LEVEL CONTROL—In Level mode, this
menu lets you select the level parameter (L0-
L9) to use for a CW frequency or a frequency
sweep. In the Level Sweep mode, this menu
lets you select the power sweep range parame-
ters to use.

3-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT DATA DISPLAY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

q MODULATION—This menu provides you

with access to sub-menus that let you select
the type of signal modulation (AM, FM, FM, or
Pulse) and control the option settings for each
type.
q SYSTEM—This menu provides you with ac-
cess to sub-menus that let you (1) reset the in-
strument to factory-selected default values; (2)
configure the front panel, rear panel, RF, and
GPIB; (3) set incremental sizes for editing fre-
quency, power level, and time parameters; (4)
set the reference multiplier for frequency scal-
ing; (5) save or recall instrument setups; (6)
disable front panel data display; and (7) per-
form instrument self-test.

Main Menu Key Cursor

With the exception of the SYSTEM key, when any
main menu key is pressed, the main menu that is
displayed contains a cursor positioned adjacent to
the pressed key (Figure 3-2). The cursor is displayed
on all sub-menus of the current menu until a differ-
ent main menu key is pressed.
When the SYSTEM key is pressed, the System
menu is displayed. The System menu and its sub-
menus do not contain a main menu key cursor.

Menu Soft-Keys
As shown on the left, five menu soft-keys are located
below the data display and five menu soft-keys are
located to the right of the data display. In general,
CW/SWEEP
SELECT

FREQUENCY
the menu soft-keys located below the data display
CONTROL

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT select the mode of operation for the main Frequency,
LEVEL
CONTROL

MODULATION
Level/ALC, Modulation, and System menus and the
SYSTEM
preset parameters for the main Frequency Control
and Level Control menus; the menu soft-keys lo-
cated to the right of the data display either control a
function on the current menu display or select an
additional sub-menu. Menu labels that identify the
current function of each soft-key are shown on the
menu display adjacent to the soft-keys.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-11
LOCAL (FRONT DATA ENTRY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

3-4 DATA ENTRY AREA The value of a selected 682XXB/683XXB parameter can be changed
using the rotary data knob and/or keys of the data entry area. Each
element of the data entry area is identified in Figure 3-3 and described
in the following paragraphs.

Cursor Clear Back

Control Entry Space Terminator
Key Key Key Keys

CLEAR BACK
ENTRY SPACE GHz
Sec
dBm

7 8 9
MHz
ms
dB

4 5 6
kHz
ms
STEPS
1 2 3
Hz
ns
0 ADRS

Rotary Keypad
Data
Knob

Figure 3-3. Front Panel Data Entry Area

Cursor Control Key

In general, this diamond-shaped key controls the
movement of the cursor on the display. When a pa-
rameter is opened for editing, a cursor appears un-
der the open parameter. Each time the < or > pad is
pressed, the cursor moves left or right by one digit.
The Ù or Ú pad can then be used to increase or de-
crease the value of the parameter. The unit size of
the increase or decrease that occurs each time the Ù
or Ú pad is pressed is determined by the cursor posi-
tion.
In addition, when editing frequency, power level,
and time parameters, the incremental size can be
set to a specific value using a system configuration
sub-menu. Once set and activated, each time the Ù
or Ú pad is pressed, the parameter’s value increases
or decreases by the set amount.

3-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT DATA ENTRY
PANEL) OPERATION AREA

Rotary Data Knob

The rotary data knob can be used to change the
value of a parameter that is open for editing. The
cursor is moved under the open parameter using the
< and > pads of the cursor control key. Then, by
slowly turning the knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise the value of the parameter is increased or
decreased by the unit size. The unit size is deter-
mined by the cursor placement. Turning the knob
rapidly changes the value of the parameter in larger
steps.
When editing frequency, power level, and time pa-
rameters, the incremental size can be set to a spe-
cific value using a system configuration sub-menu.
Once set and activated, each time the knob is
turned clockwise or counter-clockwise, the param-
eter’s value increases or decreases by the set
amount.

KEYPAD
The numeric keypad provides for entering fre-
quency, power level, time, and number-of-steps pa-
rameters and GPIB address values. The “–” key
functions as a “change sign” key during any keypad
entry.

CLEAR ENTRY Key

When a parameter is open for editing, the CLEAR
ENTRY key is used to clear the parameter entry.

BACK SPACE Key

The BACK SPACE key is used to correct keypad
data entry errors by deleting the last number, “–”, or
decimal point entered.

Terminator Keys
The terminator keys are used to terminate keypad
data entries and change the parameter values in
memory. If the entered value is outside the allow-
able range of the open parameter, an error message
will be displayed along with an audible “beep”. The
terminator keys are as follows:
GHz / Sec / dBm
MHz / ms / dB
kHz / ms / STEPS
Hz / ns / ADRS

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-13
LOCAL (FRONT INSTRUMENT
PANEL) OPERATION START-UP

3-5 INSTRUMENT START-UP Now that you have familiarized yourself with the layout of the signal
generator’s front panel controls and data display, you are ready to be-
gin operating the instrument. Begin by powering it up.

Powering Up Connect the 682XXB/683XXB to an ac power source

the 682XXB/ by following the procedure in the Installation chap-
683XXB ter. This automatically places the instrument in op-
eration (front panel OPERATE LED on).

Start-Up During power up, the start-up display (below) ap-

Display pears on the data display. It provides you with the
revision level of the installed firmware and informs
you that the instrument is loading programs. The
start-up display remains displayed until the signal
generator has loaded all programs.

Upon completion of power up, the 682XXB/683XXB

returns to the exact configuration it was in when
last turned off.

Standby Whenever the signal generator is not being used, it

Operation should be left connected to the power source and
placed in standby. Standby operation provides
power to keep the internal time base at operating
temperature. This assures specified frequency accu-
LEVEL
racy and stability when the 682XXB/683XXB is
CONTROL
place in operation.
MODULATION

SYSTEM NOTE
During standby operation, the fan runs
OPERATE
continuously.
LINE

STANDBY
Press LINE to switch the unit from OPERATE
(green LED on) to STANDBY (orange LED on).

NOTE
Line
Key When switching to operate from standby,
allow at least a 30-minute warmup before
beginning 682XXB/683XXB operations.

3-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT INSTRUMENT
PANEL) OPERATION START-UP

Self-Testing The 682XXB/683XXB firmware includes internal di-

the 682XXB/ agnostics that self-test the instrument. These self-
683XXB test diagnostics perform a brief go/no-go test of most
of the PCBs and other internal assemblies. If the
signal generator fails self-test, an error message is
displayed on the data display. Error messages and
descriptions are listed in the Operator Maintenance
chapter of this manual.
CAUTION
During self-test with RF OUTPUT set to ON, the output
power level is set to 0 dBm. Always disconnect sensitive
equipment from the unit before performing self-test.

You can perform a self-test of the signal generator at

any time during normal operation. To perform a
self-test from any menu, press SYSTEM . Then,
when the System Menu (below) is displayed, press
Selftest .

Resetting to You can reset the 682XXB/683XXB to the factory-

Default selected default parameter values at any time dur-
Parameters ing normal operation. Identical model numbers of
the series 682XXB signal generators and the series
683XXB signal generators have the same default
NOTE
parameters. Table 3-1, on the following page, lists
Resetting the instrument clears the the default parameters for all 682XXB/683XXB
setup presently in place. If these pa- models.
rameter values are needed for fu-
ture testing, save them as a stored To reset the signal generator, press SYSTEM .
setup before resetting the signal When the System Menu (above) is displayed, press
generator. (For information on sav- Reset .
ing/recalling instrument setups, re-
fer to paragraph 3-14.)

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-15
LOCAL (FRONT RESET (DEFAULT)
PANEL) OPERATION PARAMETERS

Table 3-1. Series 682XXB/683XXB Reset (Default) Parameters (1 of 2)

FREQUENCY PARAMETERS (GHz)
MODEL
NUMBER
F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 DF

68X37B 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X45B 3.5 2.2 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X47B 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 20.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X53B 3.5 2.0 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X55B 3.5 2.2 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X59B 3.5 2.0 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 26.5 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X63B 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X65B 3.5 2.2 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X69B 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 40.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X75B 3.5 2.2 50.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 50.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X77B 3.5 2.0 50.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 50.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X85B 3.5 2.2 60.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 60.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X87B 3.5 2.0 60.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 60.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X95B 3.5 2.2 65.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 65.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

68X97B 3.5 2.0 65.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 3.5 2.0 65.0 2.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 14.0 17.0 20.0 1.0

POWER LEVEL PARAMETERS (dBm)

MODEL
NUMBER
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9

68X37B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X45B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X47B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X53B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X55B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X59B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X63B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X65B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X69B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

3-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT RESET (DEFAULT)
PANEL) OPERATION PARAMETERS

Table 3-1. Series 682XXB/683XXB Reset (Default) Parameters (2 of 2)

POWER LEVEL PARAMETERS (dBm)

MODEL
NUMBER
L0 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9

68X75B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X77B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X85B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X87B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X95B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

68X97B +1.0 0.0 –1.0 –2.0 –3.0 –4.0 –5.0 –6.0 –7.0 –8.0

STEP SWEEP LEVEL SWEEP

MODEL SWEEP LEVEL
NUMBER TIME NUMBER OF NUMBER OF OFFSET
DWELL TIME DWELL TIME
STEPS STEPS

68X37B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X45B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X47B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X53B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X55B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X59B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X63B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X65B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X69B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X75B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X77B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X85B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X87B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X95B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

68X97B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0.0 dB

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-17
LOCAL (FRONT ENTERING
PANEL) OPERATION DATA

3-6 ENTERING DATA Before proceeding to the various modes of signal generator operation,
you need to know how to enter data from the front panel. Entering
data refers to changing a parameter’s value by editing its current
value or entering a new value to replace the current value. The follow-
ing instructions describe how to (1) open a parameter, (2) edit its cur-
rent value, and (3) enter a new value.

A typical 682XXB/683XXB menu display (below) is used throughout

the data entry instructions. At this menu display, you can edit both
the CW frequency and the output power level parameters.

If you wish to follow along on your instrument, you can obtain this
same menu display by resetting your instrument (press SYSTEM ,
then press Reset ).

Opening the In order for the value of a parameter to be changed,

Parameter the parameter must first be opened.

To open the frequency parameter from the above

menu, press Edit F1 . The menu display now
changes to show that the menu soft-key Edit F1 has
been pressed and that the frequency parameter has
been opened. An open parameter is indicated by
placing it in a window with a movable cursor under
its digits.

Only one parameter can be open at a time. If you

press Edit L1 , then the frequency parameter will
close and the power level parameter will open.

3-18 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT ENTERING
PANEL) OPERATION DATA

Editing the To change the current value of a parameter by edit-

Current Value ing, you can use either the cursor control key or the
rotary data knob.

Using the Cursor Control Key

Cursor
Control
Using the < and > pads of the cursor control key,
Key move the cursor under the digit where you want to
begin editing. Then increase or decrease the value of
the parameter using the Ù or Ú pad of the cursor
control key. The unit size of the increase or decrease
that occurs each time the Ù or Ú pad is pressed is de-
termined by the cursor position.

Using the Rotary Data Knob

You can also increase or decrease the value of the
parameter using the rotary data knob. Once you
Rotary have positioned the cursor under the digit where
Data
Knob you want to begin editing, slowly turn the knob
clockwise or counter-clockwise to increase or de-
crease the value of the parameter by the unit size.
Turning the knob rapidly changes the value of the
parameter in larger steps.

Using a Set Increment

When editing frequency, power level, and time pa-
rameters, you can increase or decrease the parame-
ter’s value by a set amount each time the Ù or Ú pad
is pressed or the rotary data knob is turned clock-
wise or counter-clockwise. For instructions on set-
ting the increment size, refer to paragraph 3-13.

Now, try changing the current value of the CW fre-

quency displayed on your instrument from 2.0 GHz
to 6.395 GHz. Use both the cursor control key’s Ù
and Ú pads and the rotary data knob to make the
value changes. When you are finished, your menu
display should look similar to the example below.

To close the open parameter when you are finished

editing , press Edit F1 or make another menu selec-
tion.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-19
LOCAL (FRONT ENTERING
PANEL) OPERATION DATA

Entering a To change the current value of a parameter by en-

New Value tering a new value for the parameter, use the data
entry keypad and termination keys.

As soon as you press one of the keys on the data en-

try keypad, the current parameter display clears for
entry of a new value. Enter the new value for the
parameter, then press the appropriate terminator
key to store it in memory. If the entered value is out-
Clear Back
Entry Space Terminator side the allowable range of the open parameter, the
Key Key Keys entry is not accepted and the previous value for the
parameter is displayed.
CLEAR BACK
ENTRY SPACE GHz
Sec
dBm
NOTE
7 8 9
MHz
ms
A frequency entry may be terminated in
dB

4 5 6
GHz, MHz, kHz, or Hz; however, it is al-
kHz
ms
ways displayed on the data display in
STEPS
1 2 3 GHz. A time entry may be terminated in
Hz
ns
Sec, ms, ms, or ns; however it is always
0 ADRS
displayed on the data display in Sec.

Keypad If you make an error during data entry, either (1)

press BACK SPACE to delete the entry one charac-
ter at a time starting from the last character en-
tered, or (2) delete the entire entry by pressing
CLEAR ENTRY . Then, re-enter the correct value.

Now, try entering a new value for the CW frequency

displayed on your instrument using the data entry
keypad and termination keys.

To close the open parameter when you are finished

entering data, press Edit F1 or make another menu
selection.

3-20 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT CW FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

3-7 CW FREQUENCY One of the signal generator’s major functions is to produce discrete
OPERATION CW frequencies across the frequency range of the instrument. The fol-
lowing paragraphs describe how to place the 682XXB/683XXB in the
CW frequency mode, select a CW frequency and power level for out-
put, and activate the CW ramp. Use the CW Frequency Mode menu
map (Chapter 4, Figure 4-2) to follow the menu sequences.

Selecting CW To place the 682XXB/683XXB in the CW frequency

Mode mode, press the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press CW . The CW

Menu (below) is displayed.

NOTE
Refer to Chapter 7, paragraph 7-2
for Master-Slave mode operating
instructions.

NOTE
When the signal generator is reset, it
automatically comes up operating in the
CW frequency mode.

Selecting a There are several ways to select a CW frequency for

CW output. You can (1) edit the current frequency, (2)
Frequency enter a new frequency, or (3) select one of the 20 pre-
set frequency parameters.

Editing the Current Frequency

Press Edit F1 to open the frequency parameter,
then edit the current CW frequency using the cursor
control key or the rotary data knob. To close the
open frequency parameter, press Edit F1 or make
another menu selection.

Entering a New Frequency

Press Edit F1 to open the frequency parameter,
then enter the new CW frequency using the keypad
and appropriate terminator key. To close the open
frequency parameter, press Edit F1 or make an-
other menu selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-21
LOCAL (FRONT CW FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting a Preset Frequency

To select one of the preset frequencies for output,
press the main menu key

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

The CW Frequency Control menu (below) is dis-

played. This menu lets you (1) select preset frequen-
cies F0, F1, F2, M1, or M2 for output, (2) go to the
frequency list menu, or (3) go to the tagged frequen-
cies menu.

Frequency List–To go to the Frequency List menu

(below), press Freqs List . This menu lets you
tag,edit, or output a frequency from the list.

Use the cursor control key to select a frequency from

the frequency list. The selected frequency is high-
lighted in reverse video and displayed in full below
the frequency list.
Press Tag to mark a selected frequency (place an F
in front of it). If the frequency is already tagged,
pressing Tag will untag it (remove the F). Tagging
selected frequencies lets you quickly switch between
them using the scan keys of the Tagged Frequencies
menu.
Press Edit to edit the selected frequency or enter a
new frequency.

3-22 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT CW FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Press Output Freq to output the selected frequency.

This frequency is output until you select another
frequency from the list and press Output Freq . On
the frequency list, the output frequency selection is
marked by a black square or, if tagged, an F high-
lighted in reverse video.
When you are finished, press Previous Menu to re-
turn to the CW Frequency Control menu display.
Scanning Tagged Frequencies–To go to the
Tagged Frequencies menu (below) from the CW Fre-
quency Control menu, press Tag Freq Menu .

This menu lets you select the tagged frequencies for

output using the Scan Up and Scan Dn keys.
Return to the CW Frequency Control menu by
pressing Previous Menu .

Selecting a While in the CW frequency mode, you can edit the

Power Level current CW frequency output power level or enter a
new output power level.

Editing the Current Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then edit the current power level using the cursor
control key or rotary data knob. To close the open
power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make an-
other menu selection.

Entering a New Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then enter the new power level using the keypad
and appropriate terminator key. To close the open
power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make an-
other menu selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-23
LOCAL (FRONT CW FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

NOTE
You can also select any of the preset
power levels or a power level sweep for a
CW frequency. For instructions, refer to
paragraphs 3-9 (Fixed Power Level Op-
eration) and 3-10 (Power Level Sweep Op-
eration).

CW Ramp When active, the signal generator’s CW ramp pro-

vides a repetitive 0V to 10V ramp output to the rear
panel HORIZ OUT BNC connector and AUX I/O con-
nector. The CW ramp is used to drive a scalar ana-
lyzer display.

To go to the CW Ramp menu (below) from the CW

menu, press CW Ramp Menu .

This menu lets you set the ramp speed and turn the
CW ramp on/off.

To set ramp speed, press Sweep Time . The sweep

time parameter opens for editing. Edit the current
sweep time using the cursor control key or rotary
data knob or enter a new sweep time using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. The sweep
time entered must be in the range of 30 ms to
99 sec. To close the open sweep time parameter
when you are done, press Sweep Time or make an-
other menu selection.

Press CW Ramp to turn the CW ramp on. While

the CW ramp is on, the message CW Ramp ap-
pears on the right side of frequency title bar on all
CW menus.

Press Previous Menu to return to the CW menu.

3-24 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

3-8 SWEEP FREQUENCY The signal generator can generate broad (full range) and narrow band
OPERATION sweeps across the frequency range of the instrument. The series
682XXB signal generator has two sweep frequency modes—step sweep
and manual sweep. The series 683XXB signal generator has three
sweep frequency modes—analog sweep, step sweep, and manual
sweep. The following paragraphs describe how to select each sweep
frequency mode, a sweep range, an output power level, a sweep trig-
ger, and frequency markers. Use the Analog Sweep, Step Sweep, and
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-3,
4-4, and 4-5) to follow the menu sequences.

Selecting In analog sweep frequency mode, the 683XXB’s out-

Analog Sweep put frequency is swept between selected start and
Mode stop frequencies. When the sweep width is
>100 MHz, the sweep is phase-lock corrected at both
NOTE the start and stop frequencies and at each band-
switch point. When the sweep width is £100 MHz,
In 683X5B models performing ana-
only the center frequency of the sweep is phase-lock
log sweeps betw een 0.5 and
corrected.
2.2 GHz, the sweep is phase-lock
corrected as follows. For sweep
To place the 683XXB in analog sweep frequency
widths of >25 MHz, phase-lock cor-
mode, press the main menu key
rection occurs at both the start and
stop frequencies and at each band- CW/SWEEP
switch point. For sweep widths of SELECT
£25 MHz, only the center frequency
of the sweep is phase-lock cor-
At the resulting menu display, press Analog . The
Analog Sweep Menu (below) is then displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a sweep range (edit the sweep start and
stop frequency parameters).
q Go to the sweep ramp menu (set the sweep
time and select a sweep trigger).
q Select an output power level for the sweep.
q Go to the alternate sweep menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-25
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Setting the The duration of the analog sweep can be set for any
Analog Sweep time in the range of 30 ms to 99 sec. The sweep time
Time parameter is set from the sweep ramp menu.

To go to the Analog Sweep Ramp menu (below) from

the Analog Sweep menu, press Sweep Ramp .

This menu lets you set the sweep time and go to the
trigger menu.

To open the sweep time parameter for editing, press

Sweep Time . Edit the current sweep time using the
cursor control key or the rotary data knob or enter a
new sweep time using the key pad and appropriate
termination key. To close the open sweep time pa-
rameter once you have set the desired time, press
Sweep Time or make another menu selection.

To go to the Analog Sweep Trigger menu from this

menu, press Trigger Menu . Sweep trigger is de-
scribed on the next page.

Press Previous Menu to return to the Analog Sweep

menu.

3-26 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting a The 682XXB/683XXB provides sweep triggering for

Sweep frequency sweeps and CW power sweep. There are
Trigger three modes of sweep triggering, each selectable
from the trigger menu. The following is a descrip-
tion of each mode.

q Auto (Automatic)–The sweep continually

sweeps from its start frequency or power level
to its stop frequency or power level with opti-
mal retrace time.
q External–The sweep recurs when triggered by
an external TTL-compatible clock pulse to the
rear panel AUX I/O connector.
q Single–A single sweep starts when the trigger
key is pressed. If a sweep is in progress when
the key is pressed, it aborts and resets.

To go to the Sweep Trigger menu (below) from the

Analog Sweep Ramp menu, press Trigger Menu .

To select a sweep trigger mode, press its menu soft-

key. A message showing the sweep trigger mode se-
lected appears on the right side of frequency title
bar. When you are finished, press Previous Menu to
return to the Analog Sweep Ramp menu.

If you select the single sweep trigger mode, the

menu display adds the menu soft-key Trig . Press-
ing Trig starts a single sweep. If a single sweep is
in progress, pressing Trig causes the sweep to abort
and reset.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-27
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting In step sweep frequency mode, the output frequency

Step Sweep changes in discrete, synthesized steps between se-
Mode lected start and stop frequencies. Step sweeps can
be from a high frequency to a low frequency and vice
versa. The step size or number of steps between the
start and stop frequencies and the dwell time-per-
step are controllable from a step sweep menu.

To place the 682XXB/683XXB in step sweep fre-

quency mode, press the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Step . The Step

Sweep Menu (below) is then displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a sweep range (edit the sweep start and
stop frequency parameters).
q Go to the sweep ramp menu (set the dwell
time-per-step, the step size or number of steps,
and select a sweep trigger).
q Select an output power level for the sweep.
q Go to the alternate sweep menu.

3-28 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Setting Step There are two ways to set the size of each step of the
Size and step sweep—set the step size or set the number of
Dwell Time steps. The step size range is 1 kHz to the full fre-
quency range of the signal generator (0.1 Hz to full
frequency range with Option 11); the number of
steps range is 1 to 10,000. The dwell-time-per-step
of the step sweep can be set for any time in the
range of 1 ms to 99 sec. The step size and dwell-
time-per-step parameters are set from the step
sweep ramp menu.

To go to the Step Sweep Ramp menu (below) from

the Step Sweep menu, press Sweep Ramp .

This menu lets you set the dwell time, the step size,
the number of steps, and go to the trigger menu.

Press Dwell Time to open the dwell-time-per-step

parameter.
RANGE
Press Step Size to open the step size parameter.
This error message is displayed
when (1) the step size value entered Press Num of Steps to open the number of steps pa-
is greater than the sweep range or rameter.
(2) the number of steps entered re-
sults in a step size of less than 1 kHz Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
(0.1 Hz with Option 11). Entering a the current value using the cursor control key or the
valid step size will clear the error. rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or make another menu
selection.

To go to the Step Sweep Trigger menu from this

menu, press Trigger Menu . The trigger menu lets
you select a sweep trigger (previously described on
page 3-27).

Press Previous Menu to return to the Step Sweep

menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-29
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting In manual sweep frequency mode, the output fre-

Manual quency can be manually tuned in phase-locked steps
Sweep Mode between the selected start and stop frequencies us-
ing the rotary data knob. As the knob is turned, the
current output frequency is displayed on the data
display as Fm. The step size or number of steps be-
tween the start and stop frequencies are controlla-
ble from the manual sweep menu.

To place the 682XXB/683XXB in manual sweep fre-

quency mode, press the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Manual . The

Manual Sweep menu (below) is then displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a sweep range (edit the start and stop
frequency parameters).
q Set the step size or number of steps (previously
described on page 3-29).

3-30 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting a Selecting a sweep range involves choosing a start

Sweep Range and a stop frequency for the frequency sweep. The
sweep range selection process is identical for all
sweep frequency modes (analog, step, and manual).
You can select a frequency sweep range as follows:

q Edit the current start and stop frequency pa-

rameter values.
q Enter new start and stop frequency parameter
values.
q Select one of the preset sweep range parame-
ters (F1-F2, F3-F4, F5-dF, or F6-dF).

Editing the Current Start / Stop Frequencies

To edit the current frequency sweep range, open
either the start or stop frequency parameter. In the
display above, Edit F1 opens the start frequency
parameter and Edit F2 opens the stop frequency
parameter.
RANGE
Edit the open frequency parameter using the cursor
This error message is displayed control key or the rotary data knob. When you are
when (1) the analog sweep start fre- finished, close the open parameter by pressing its
quency entered is greater than the menu edit soft-key or by making another menu
stop frequency (683XXB models selection.
only), or (2) the dF value entered re-
sults in a sweep outside the range of Entering New Start / Stop Frequencies
the instrument. Entering valid val- To enter a new frequency sweep range, open either
ues will clear the error. the start or stop frequency parameter (press Edit F1
or Edit F2 ).
Enter a new frequency using the keypad and appro-
priate terminator key. When you are finished, close
the open parameter by pressing its menu edit soft-
key or by making another menu selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-31
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting a Preset Sweep Range

There are four preset sweep range parameters, se-
lectable in the analog sweep, step sweep, and man-
ual sweep frequency modes. The following is a
description of each preset sweep range.
q F1-F2–provides a frequency sweep between the
start frequency, F1, and the stop frequency, F2.
q F3-F4–provides a frequency sweep between the
start frequency, F3, and the stop frequency, F4.
q F5-dF–provides a symmetrical frequency
sweep about the center frequency, F5. The
sweep width is determined by the dF frequency
parameter.
q F6-dF–provides a symmetrical frequency
sweep about the center frequency, F6. The
sweep width is determined by the dF frequency
parameter.
To select one of the preset sweep ranges from any
sweep frequency mode menu, press the main menu
key

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

The Sweep Frequency Control menu (below) is dis-

played.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a full range sweep (Fmin–Fmax) or one
of the preset sweep ranges for the sweep fre-
quency mode.
q Select the frequency parameters for each pre-
set sweep range.
q Select an output power level for the sweep.
q Go to the marker list menu.

3-32 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Setting a Preset Sweep Range–At the menu,

select the sweep range (F1-F2, F3-F4, F5-dF, or
F6-dF) that you wish to set. The menu then displays
the current frequency parameters for the selected
sweep range. Now use the menu edit soft-keys to
open the frequency parameters for editing.
Edit the current frequency parameters or enter new
frequency parameter values for the sweep range. To
close the open frequency parameter when you are
finished, press its menu edit soft-key or make an-
other menu selection.
You can set all the preset sweep ranges in this man-
ner.

Selecting a While in a sweep frequency mode, you can edit the

Power Level current output power level or enter a new output
power level for the frequency sweep.

Editing the Current Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then edit the current power level using the cursor
control key or rotary data knob. To close the open
power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make an-
other menu selection.

Entering a New Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then enter the new power level using the keypad
and appropriate terminator key. To close the open
power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make an-
other menu selection.

NOTE
You can also select any of the preset
power levels for a frequency sweep or a
power level step for analog and step
sweeps. For instructions, refer to para-
graphs 3-9 (Fixed Power Level Operation)
and 3-10 (Power Level Sweep Operation).

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-33
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Frequency The 682XXB/683XXB provides up to 20 independ-

Markers ent, pre-settable markers, F0-F9 and M0-M9, that
can be used in the analog and step sweep frequency
modes for precise frequency identification. Marker
frequency accuracy is the same as sweep frequency
accuracy. The markers are visible on a CRT display.

The 683XXB generates video and intensity markers.

The 682XXB produces only video markers.

q Video Marker–produces a pulse on a CRT

display at each marker frequency. The video
marker is either a +5V or a –5V pulse avail-
able at the rear panel AUX I/O connector. Pulse
polarity is selectable from a system configura-
tion menu.
q Intensity Marker–produces an intensified
dot on a CRT display at each marker fre-
quency. Intensity markers are only available in
the analog sweep frequency mode. They are ob-
tained by a momentary dwell in the sweep at
each marker frequency.

To output markers during a sweep you must first se-

lect (tag) the marker frequencies from the Marker
List menu, then turn on the marker output. To go to
the Marker List menu from an analog or step sweep
frequency menu, press

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

The Sweep Frequency Control menu (below) is dis-

played.

To go to the Marker List menu from this menu,

press Marker List . The Marker List menu (next
page) is displayed. This menu lets you tag or edit
marker list frequencies and turn the markers on/off.

3-34 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Use the cursor control key to select a frequency

parameter from the marker list. The selected fre-
quency parameter is highlighted in reverse video
and displayed in full below the marker list.

Editing a Marker List Frequency

If you want to change a selected marker list fre-
quency parameter’s value, press Edit . This opens
the frequency parameter and lets you edit the cur-
rent frequency or enter a new frequency.

Tagging a Marker List Frequency

Only frequencies on the marker list that have been
tagged can be output as markers during a sweep.
Press Tag to tag a selected frequency parameter
(place an m in front of it). If a frequency parameter
is already tagged, pressing Tag will untag it (re-
move the m).

Activating Markers
The soft-keys Video Markers and Intensity Markers
toggle the markers on and off.
Video Markers–To output the tagged marker fre-
quencies as video markers during an analog or step
sweep, press Video Markers . Video markers will be
displayed on the CRT for all tagged marker frequen-
cies that are within the sweep frequency range.
Intensity Markers–(only available in analog sweep
frequency mode) To output the tagged marker fre-
quencies as intensity markers during an analog
sweep, press Intensity Markers . Intensity markers
will be displayed on the CRT for all tagged marker
frequencies that are within the analog sweep fre-
quency range.
Press Previous Menu to return to the Sweep Fre-
quency Control menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-35
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Selecting In alternate sweep frequency mode, the 683XXB’s

Alternate output frequency sweeps alternately between any
Sweep Mode two sweep ranges in analog sweep or any two sweep
ranges in step sweep; the 682XXB’s output fre-
quency sweeps alternately between any two sweep
ranges in step sweep. The process of selecting and
activating the alternate sweep is identical for both
analog and step sweep frequency modes.

To select the alternate sweep mode for analog

sweeps, start with the Analog Sweep Menu display;
to select the alternate sweep mode for step sweeps,
start with the Step Sweep Menu display (below).

To go to the Alternate Sweep menu (below) from the

Step Sweep menu, press Alt Swp Menu .

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Turn the alternate sweep mode on/off.
q Go to the alternate range menu to select a
sweep range for the alternate sweep.
q Go to the alternate level menu to select a
power level for the alternate sweep.

Activating the Alternate Sweep

The Alternate Sweep menu soft-key Alt Sweep tog-
gles the alternate sweep mode on and off.
Press Alt Sweep to turn on the alternate sweep
mode. Notice that the Alternate Sweep menu (on
the following page) changes to show that the alter-
nate sweep is now active.

3-36 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

Now, press Previous Menu to return to the Step

Sweep Menu display (or the Analog Sweep Menu
display if operating in analog sweep frequency
mode).
Notice the changes to the Step Sweep Menu display
(below). These changes indicate that the alternate
sweep frequency mode is active.

Now, press Alt Swp Menu to return to the Alternate

Sweep menu.

Selecting an Alternate Sweep Range

To go to the Alternate Range menu (below) from the
Alternate Sweep menu, press Alt Range .

Select the alternate sweep range (Full, F1-F2, F3-F4,

F5-dF, or F6-dF). The menu then displays the cur-
rent frequency parameters for the selected sweep
range. If you wish to change a frequency parameter,
use the menu edit soft-key to open the parameter,
then edit it.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-37
LOCAL (FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

When you are done selecting the alternate sweep

range, press Previous Menu to return to the Alter-
nate Sweep menu.

Selecting an Alternate Sweep Power Level

To go to the Alternate Level menu (shown below)
from the Alternate Sweep menu, press Alt Level .

Select the power level for the alternate sweep range

(L0, L1, L2, L3, or L4). The menu then displays the
current level parameter for the selected power level.
If you wish to change the level, use the menu edit
soft-key to open the parameter, then edit it.
A menu edit soft-key is also provided to let you
change the power level of the main sweep.
CAUTION
Performing alternate sweeps using power levels that cross
step attenuator switch points can cause excessive wear on
the switches and reduce the life expectancy of the step
attenuator.

When you are done selecting the power level for the
alternate sweep range and editing the power level of
the main sweep, press Previous Menu to return to
the Alternate Sweep menu.

3-38 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT FIXED POWER
PANEL) OPERATION LEVEL OPERATION

3-9 FIXED POWER LEVEL The 682XXB/683XXB provides leveled output power over a maximum
OPERATION range of up to 28 dB (up to 131 dB with Option 2) for CW and sweep
frequency operations. Instruments with Option 15B provide leveled
output power over a maximum range of up to 22 dB (up to 125 dB with
Option 2). The following paragraphs describe how to place the signal
generator in fixed (non-swept) power level mode, select a power level
for output, and activate level offset. Use the Fixed (Non-Swept) Power
Level Mode menu map (Chapter 4, Figure 4-6) to follow the menu se-
quences.

Selecting To place the 682XXB/683XXB in a fixed power level

Fixed Power mode from a CW or sweep (analog, step, or manual)
Level Mode frequency menu, press the main menu key

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Level . The

Level Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Edit the power level parameter.
q Edit the level offset parameter.
q Turn level offset on/off.

Selecting a There are several ways to select a power level for

Power Level output. You can (1) edit the current power level, (2)
enter a new power level, or (3) select one of the 10
preset power level parameters.

Editing the Current Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then edit the current power level using the cursor
control key or the rotary data knob. To close the
open power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make
another menu selection.

Entering a New Power Level

Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter,
then enter the new power level using the keypad

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-39
LOCAL (FRONT FIXED POWER
PANEL) OPERATION LEVEL OPERATION

and appropriate terminator key. To close the open

power level parameter, press Edit L1 or make an-
other menu selection.

Selecting a Preset Power Level

To select one of the preset power levels for output,
press the main menu key

LEVEL
CONTROL

The Level Control menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select preset power levels L0, L1, L2, L3, or L4
for output.
q Go to the Level List menu.
q Go to the Tagged Levels menu.

Level List– To go to the Level List menu (below),

press Level List .

This menu lets you select a power level from the list
to tag, edit, or output.
Use the cursor control key to select a power level
from the level list. The selected power level is high-
lighted in reverse video and displayed in full below
the level list.

3-40 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT FIXED POWER
PANEL) OPERATION LEVEL OPERATION

Press Tag to mark a selected power level (place an

L in front of it). If a power level is already tagged,
pressing Tag will untag it (remove the L). Tagging
selected power levels lets you quickly switch be-
tween them using the scan keys of the Tagged Lev-
els menu.
Press Edit to edit the selected power level or enter
a new power level.
Press Output Level to output the selected level.
This power level is output until you select another
level from the list and press Output Level . On the
level list, the output power level selection is marked
by a black square or, if tagged, an L highlighted in
reverse video.
When you are finished , press Previous Menu to re-
turn to the Level Control menu display.
Scanning Tagged Levels–To go to the Tagged Lev-
els menu (below) from the Level Control menu,
press Tag Lvl Menu .

This menu lets you select the tagged power levels

for output using the Scan Up and Scan Dn keys.
Return to the Level Control menu display by press-
ing Previous Menu .

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-41
LOCAL (FRONT FIXED POWER
PANEL) OPERATION LEVEL OPERATION

Level Offset Level offset lets you compensate for a device on the
signal generator’s output that alters the RF output
power level at the point of interest. For example, the
power level at the test device may be less or more
than the displayed power level because of the loss
through an external transmission line or the gain of
an amplifier located between the 682XXB/683XXB
RF output and the test device. Using the level offset
function, you can apply a constant to the displayed
power level that compensates for this loss or gain.
The displayed power level will then reflect the ac-
tual power level at the test device.

To enter an offset value and apply it to the displayed

power level, go to the Level Menu. Then press
Edit Offset . As shown in the following menu, this
opens the offset parameter for editing.

Edit the current offset value using the cursor con-

trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new offset
OFFSET value using the keypad and appropriate terminator
key. To close the open offset parameter when you are
When Offset is selected ON, this done, press Edit Offset or make another menu selec-
status message is displayed on all tion.
menu displays to remind the opera-
tor that a constant (offset) has been Press Offset to apply the offset to the displayed
applied to the displayed power level. power level. In this example, a+2.00 dB offset is ap-
plied to L1. L1 then displays a power level of
+2.00 dBm.

3-42 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

3-10 POWER LEVEL SWEEP The 682XXB/683XXB provides leveled output power sweeps at CW fre-
OPERATION quencies and in conjunction with frequency sweeps (analog and step).
Power level sweeps can be from a high level to a low level or vice
versa. The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating
instructions for the CW power sweep mode and the sweep frequency/
step power modes. Use the CW Power Sweep Mode and Sweep Fre-
quency/Step Power Mode menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-7 and 4-8)
to follow the menu sequences.

CAUTION
Performing alternate sweeps using power levels that cross
step attenuator switch points can cause excessive wear on
the switches and reduce the life expectancy of the step
attenuator.

Selecting CW In the CW power sweep mode, output power steps

Power Sweep between any two power levels at a single CW fre-
Mode quency. Available menus let you set or select the
sweep range, the step size, the dwell time-per-step,
and the sweep trigger.

To place the signal generator in a CW power sweep

mode from a CW frequency menu, press the main
menu key

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Lvl Swp . The

CW Level Sweep Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a power level sweep range (edit the
sweep start and stop power level parameters).
q Go to the sweep ramp menu (set the dwell
time-per-step, the step size or number of steps,
and select a sweep trigger).

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-43
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Setting CW There are two ways to set the size of each step of the
Power Sweep CW power sweep—set the step size or set the
Step Size and number of steps. The step size range is 0.01 dB to
Dwell Time the full power range of the instrument; the number
of steps range is 1 to 10,000. The dwell-time-per-
step of the CW power sweep can be set for any time
in the range of 1 ms to 99 sec. The step size and
dwell-time-per-step are set from the CW Level
Sweep Ramp menu (below).

To go to the CW Level Sweep Ramp menu from the

CW Level Sweep menu, press Sweep Ramp .

This menu lets you set the dwell time, the step size,
the number of steps, and go to the trigger menu.

Press Dwell Time to open the dwell-time-per-step

parameter.
RANGE
Press Step Size to open the step size parameter.
This error message is displayed
when (1) the step size value entered Press Num of Steps to open the number of steps pa-
is greater than the level sweep rameter.
range or (2) the number of steps en-
tered results in a step size of less Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
than 0.01 dB. Entering a valid step the current value using the cursor control key or ro-
size will clear the error. tary data knob or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.

To go to the CW Level Sweep Trigger menu from

this menu, press Trigger Menu . The trigger menu
lets you select a CW power sweep trigger (described
on the following page).

Press Previous Menu to return to the CW Level

Sweep menu.

3-44 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Selecting a There are three modes of triggering provided for the

CW Power CW power sweep—automatic, external, and single.
Sweep The sweep trigger is selectable from the CW Level
Trigger Sweep Trigger menu. The following is a description
of each trigger mode.

q Auto (Automatic)–The CW power sweep con-

tinually sweeps from its start power level to its
stop power level with optimal retrace time.
q External–The CW power sweep recurs when
triggered by an external TTL-compatible clock
pulse to the rear panel AUX I/O connector.
q Single–A single CW power sweep starts when
the trigger key is pressed. If a sweep is in prog-
ress when the key is pressed, it aborts and re-
sets.

To go to the CW Level Sweep Trigger menu (below)

from the CW Level Sweep Ramp menu, press
Trigger Menu .

To select a CW power sweep trigger mode, press its

menu soft-key. A message showing the CW power
sweep trigger mode selected appears on the right
side of the level mode title bar.

If you select the single sweep trigger mode, the

menu display adds the menu soft-key Trig . Press-
ing Trig starts a single CW power sweep. If a single
CW power sweep is in progress, pressing Trig
causes the sweep to abort and reset.

Press Previous Menu to return to the CW Level

Sweep Ramp menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-45
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Selecting a Selecting a power level sweep range consists of

Power Level choosing a start and stop level for the power level
Sweep Range sweep. The power level sweep range selection pro-
cess is identical for all power level sweep modes—
CW power sweep, analog sweep frequency/step
power, and step sweep frequency/step power. You
can select a power level sweep range as follows:

q Edit the current start and stop power level pa-

rameter values.
q Enter new start and stop power level parame-
ter values.
q Select one of the preset power level sweep
range parameters (L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8,
or L9-L0).

Editing the Current Start / Stop Power Levels

To edit the current power level sweep range, open
either the start or stop power level parameter. In
the display above, Edit L1 opens the start power
level parameter and Edit L2 opens the stop power
level parameter.
Edit the open power level parameter using the cur-
sor control key or the rotary data knob. When you
are finished, close the open parameter by pressing
its menu edit soft-key or by making another menu
selection.

Entering New Start / Stop Power Levels

To enter a new power level sweep range start by
opening either the start or stop power level parame-
ters (press Edit L1 or Edit L2 ).
Enter a new power level using the keypad and ap-
propriate terminator key. When you are finished,
close the open parameter by pressing its menu edit
soft-key or by making another menu selection.

3-46 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Selecting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range

There are five preset power level sweep range pa-
rameters selectable in the power level sweep modes.
These preset power level sweep range parameters
are L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8, and L9-L0.
To select one of the preset power level sweep ranges
from a Level Sweep menu, press the main menu key

LEVEL
CONTROL

The Level Sweep Control menu (below) is displayed.

In addition to letting you select one of the preset

sweep ranges for the power level sweep, this menu
lets you set the start and stop power level parame-
ters for each preset sweep range.

Setting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range–At

the Level Sweep Control menu, select the power
level sweep range (L1-L2, L3-L4, L5-L6, L7-L8, or
L9-L0) that you wish to set. The menu then displays
the current power level parameters for the selected
power level sweep range. Now use the menu edit
soft-keys to open the power level parameters for ed-
iting.

Edit the current power level parameter values or

enter new power level parameter values for the
power level sweep range. To close the open power
level parameter when you are finished, press its
menu edit soft-key or make another menu selection.

You can set all the preset power level sweep ranges
in this manner.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-47
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Selecting a In analog sweep frequency/step power mode or step

Sweep Fre- sweep frequency/step power mode, a power level
quency / Step step occurs after each frequency sweep. The power
Power Mode level remains constant for the length of time re-
quired to complete each frequency sweep. Available
menus let you control the power level sweep range
and step size.

To select an analog sweep frequency/step power

mode, start with an analog sweep menu display; to
select a step sweep frequency/step power mode,
start with a step sweep menu display. Then press
the main menu key

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Lvl Swp . The

Level Sweep Menu is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select a power level sweep range (edit the
sweep start and stop power level parameters).
q Go to the sweep ramp menu (set the step size
or number of steps).

3-48 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT POWER LEVEL
PANEL) OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION

Setting Power There are two ways to set the step size of the power
Level Step level step that occurs after each frequency
Size sweep–set the step size or set the number of steps.
The step size range is 0.01 dB to the full power
range of the signal generator; the number of steps
range is 1 to 10,000. The power level step size is set
from the level sweep ramp menu.

To go to the Level Sweep Ramp menu (below)from

the Level Sweep menu, press Sweep Ramp .

This menu lets you set the step size and the number
of steps.

Press Step Size to open the step size parameter.

RANGE
Press Num of Steps to open the number of steps pa-
This error message is displayed rameter.
when (1) the step size value entered
is greater than the level sweep Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
range or (2) the number of steps en- the current value using the cursor control key or ro-
tered results in a step size of less tary data knob or enter a new value using the key-
than 0.01 dB. Entering a valid step pad and appropriate termination key. When you
size will clear the error. have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.

Press Previous Menu to return to the Level Sweep

menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-49
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

3-11 LEVELING The 682XXB/683XXB generates leveled output power over a maximum
OPERATIONS range of up to 28 dB (up to 131 dB with Option 2). Instruments with
Option 15B provide leveled output power over a maximum range of up
to 22 dB (up to 125 dB with Option 2). An automatic level control
(ALC) system controls the amplitude and power level of the RF output.
The operator can select the ALC mode of operation—internal, external
(detector or power meter), or fixed gain (ALC off). In addition, the sig-
nal generator provides (1) an ALC power slope function that provides
compensation for high frequency system or cable losses, (2) a decouple
function that allows decoupling of the step attenuator (if equipped)
from the ALC system, and (3) a user level (flatness correction) calibra-
tion function that provides compensation for path-variations-with-
frequency in a test setup.

The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instruc-

tions for the power leveling modes and functions. Use the Leveling
Modes menu map (Chapter 4, Figure 4-9) to follow the menu se-
quences.

Selecting a The ALC system is a feedback control system, in

Leveling which the output power is measured at a detector
Mode and compared with the expected power level. If the
output and desired power levels do not equal, the
ALC adjusts the power output until they do. The
ALC feedback signal can come from either the inter-
nal detector or an external detector or power meter.
Alternatively, the output power can be set to a fixed
level without using the normal feedback (ALC off).
The ALC mode menu lets you make the selection of
a leveling mode.

To go to the ALC Mode menu, first press the main

menu key

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

At the Level/ALC Select Menu display, press

ALC Mode . The ALC Mode Menu (below) is dis-
played.

3-50 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

The ALC Mode menu lets you perform the following:

q Go to the leveling menu (select the ALC mode
of operation).
q Go to the attenuation menu (decouple the
attenuator, if equipped, from the ALC system
and set the power level and attenuation).
q Select either the front panel or rear panel ex-
ternal ALC input.

Internal Leveling
This is the normal (default) leveling mode. Output
power is sensed by the internal detector in the
682XXB/683XXB. The detector output signal is fed
back to the ALC circuitry to adjust the output power
level. Internal ALC is selected from the leveling
menu.
To go to the Leveling Menu from the ALC Mode
menu, press Leveling Menu . The Leveling Menu
(below) is displayed.

To select internal ALC, press Internal .

Pressing one of the other leveling menu soft-keys
External Detector , Power Meter , or Fixed Gain will
turn off internal leveling.
Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC Mode
menu.

External Leveling
In external leveling, the output power from the
682XXB/683XXB is detected by an external detector
or power meter. The signal from the detector or
power meter is returned to the ALC circuitry. The
ALC adjusts the output power to keep the power
level constant at the point of detection. The external
ALC source input is selected from the leveling
menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-51
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Before going to the Leveling Menu from the ALC

Mode menu, select whether the external ALC signal
is to be connected to the front- or rear-panel EXT
ALC IN connector.
At the ALC Mode menu, press Ext ALC Front to se-
lect front panel input, or Ext ALC Rear to select
rear panel input.
Now, press Leveling Menu to go to the Leveling
Menu (below).

Next, select the type of external sensor you are us-

ing to detect the output power.
To select the external ALC input from an external
detector, press External Detector .
To select the external ALC input from a power me-
ter, press Power Meter .
After you have made the external ALC input con-
nection and selected the sensor type, press
ALC Loop . The ALC Loop Menu (below) is dis-
played.

While monitoring the power level at the external de-

tection point, first press Ext ALC Adj , then use the
cursor control key or rotary data knob to adjust the
external ALC signal to obtain the set power level.
To return to the Leveling Menu, press ALC Mode
then press Leveling Menu .

3-52 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

At the Leveling menu, pressing either Internal or

Fixed Gain will turn off external leveling.
Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC Mode
menu.

Fixed Gain
In the fixed gain mode, the ALC is disabled. The RF
Level DAC and step attenuator (if installed) are
used to control the relative power level. Power is not
detected at any point, and the absolute power level
is uncalibrated. Fixed gain mode is selected from
the leveling menu.
Press Leveling Menu to go to the Leveling menu.

To select fixed gain mode, press Fixed Gain .

To return to normal ALC operation, press Internal .
Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC Mode
menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-53
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Attenuator In 682XXB/683XXBs equipped with option 2 step

Decoupling attenuators, the ALC and attenuator work in con-
junction to provide leveled output power down to
–120 dBm. In the normal (coupled) leveling mode,
when the desired power level is set, the correct com-
bination of ALC level and attenuator setting is de-
termined by the instrument firmware. In some
applications, such as receiver sensitivity testing, it
is desireable to control the ALC level and attenuator
setting separately by decoupling the step attenuator
from the ALC. The ALC mode menu lets you select
attenuator decoupling.

At the ALC Mode menu, press Atten Menu . The

Attenuator Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you decouple the step attenuator

from the ALC, set the power level, and set the at-
tenuation in 10 dB steps.

NOTE Press Decouple to decouple the step attenuator

from the ALC.
The set power level may not be
maintained when switching be-
Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter for
tween attenuator coupling modes.
editing. Edit the current level using the cursor con-
trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value us-
ing the key pad and appropriate termination key.
When you have finished setting the power level,
press Edit L1 to close the open parameter.

To change the attenuation setting, press Incr Atten

or Decr Attn . Pressing these soft-keys changes the
attenuation in 10 dB steps.

Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC Mode

menu.

3-54 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

ALC Power The ALC power slope function lets you compensate
Slope for system, cable, and waveguide variations due to
changes in frequency. This is accomplished by line-
arly increasing or decreasing power output as the
frequency increases. As shown in the following illus-
tration, the power slope function provides you with
the ability to set both the power slope and the pivot
point. The ALC loop menu lets you activate the ALC
power slope function.

Power

Power Level
Slope
Power Slope
Pivot Point

Power at DUT
With Compensation

Power at DUT
Without Compensation

Frequency

To go to the ALC Loop Menu from the Level/ALC

Control Menu display, press ALC Loop . The ALC
Loop Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you turn the power slope on or off

and edit the slope value and pivot point frequency.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-55
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Press Slope On/Off to activate the ALC power slope

function.

Press Edit Pivot to open the pivot point frequency

parameter for editing. Edit the current frequency
SLOPE using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or
enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate
When Power Slope is selected ON, termination key. When you have finished setting the
this status message is displayed on open parameter, close it by pressing Edit Pivot
all menu displays to remind the op- again or by making another menu selection.
erator that a power slope correction
has been applied to the ALC. Press Edit Slope to open the slope parameter for
editing. Edit the current slope value using the cur-
sor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new
value using the key pad and the STEPS termination
key. When you have finished setting the open pa-
rameter, close it by pressing Edit Slope again or by
making another menu selection.

While monitoring the power level at the device-

under-test (DUT), adjust the power slope and pivot
point to level the power at the DUT.

3-56 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

User Cal The User Cal (user level flatness correction) func-
(User Level tion lets you compensate for path-variations-with-
Flatness frequency that are caused by external switching,
Correction) amplifiers, couplers, and cables in the test setup.
This is done by means of an entered power-offset ta-
ble from a GPIB power meter or calculated data.
When user level flatness correction is activated, the
set power level is delivered at the point in the test
setup where the calibration was performed. This
“flattening” of the test point power level is accom-
plished by summing a power-offset word (from the
power-offset table) with the signal generator’s nor-
mal power level DAC word at each frequency point.

Up to five user level flatness correction power-offset

tables from 2 to 801 frequency points/table can be
created and stored in 682XXB/683XXB memory for
recall. The GPIB power meters supported are the
ANRITSU Model ML4803A and the Hewlett-
Packard Models 437B, 438A, and 70100A.

GPIB 682XXB/683XXB

RF
OUTPUT

INPUT
POWER
SWITCH MATRIX, GPIB METER
AMPLIFIERS,
COUPLERS, ETC.

FLATNESS
CORRECTED
OUTPUT
DEVICE
UNDER
TEST POWER
SENSOR

Figure 3-4. Setup for Creating a Power-Offset Table (User Level Flatness Correction)

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-57
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Equipment Setup
To create a power-offset table for user level flatness
correction, connect the equipment (shown in Figure
3-4) as follows:

Step 1 Using a GPIB cable, connect the Power

Meter to the 682XXB/683XXB.

Step 2 Calibrate the Power Meter with the

Power Sensor.

Step 3 Connect the Power Sensor to the point in

the test setup where the corrected power
level is desired.

Power Meter Model and GPIB Address

In order for the 682XXB/683XXB to control the
power meter, the GPIB address and power meter
model must be selected from the Configure GPIB
menu.
Press SYSTEM to go to the System Menu display.
At the System Menu display, press Config . The Sys-
tem Configuration Menu (below) is displayed.

Next, press GPIB . The Configure GPIB menu (be-

low) is displayed.

3-58 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

At the Configure GPIB menu, press More to go to

an additional Configure GPIB menu (below).

Press Pwr Mtr Address to change the address of the

power meter on the GPIB (the power meter’s default
address is 13). Enter the new address, between 1
and 30, using the cursor control key or the data en-
try key pad and the terminator key
Hz
ns
ADRS
The new GPIB address will appear on the display.
Press Pwr Mtr Select to select the power meter
model being used. (Supported power meters are the
ANRITSU ML4803A and Hewlett-Packard 437B,
438A, and 70100A.)
Press Previous Menu to return to the main Config-
ure GPIB menu display.
At the Configure GPIB menu, press Previous Menu
to return to the System Configuration menu display.

Creating a Power-Offset Table

The 682XXB/683XXB must be in CW frequency
mode and fixed (non-swept) power level mode in or-
der to create a power-offset table for user level flat-
ness correction.
Place the signal generator in CW frequency mode by
pressing the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press CW . The

682XXB/683XXB is now in CW frequency mode.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-59
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Place the signal generator in a fixed power level

mode by pressing the main menu key

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

At the resulting menu display, press Level . The

682XXB/683XXB is now in fixed (non-swept) power
level mode.
At the Level Menu, press User Cal . The User Level
Cal menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Create a power-offset table.
q Select a measurement frequency range (edit
the start and stop frequency parameters).
q Select the number of points at which correction
information is to be taken.
q Apply a power-offset table to the test setup.

First, press the menu soft-key to select the power-

offset table (User 1, User 2, User 3, User 4, or User 5)
that you wish to create.
Next, set the measurement frequency range by
pressing Edit Start or Edit Stop to open the start
(Flo) or stop (Fhi) frequency parameter for editing.
Edit the current frequency using the cursor control
key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using
the keypad and appropriate termination key. When
you have finished setting the open parameter, close
it by pressing its menu edit soft-key again or by
making another menu selection.
Then, select the number of frequency points at
which correction information is to be taken by press-
ing Edit Points to open the number-of-points pa-
rameter for editing. Edit the current number-of-
points using the cursor control key or rotary data
knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the
STEPS termination key. (The number of points

3-60 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

range is 2 to 801.) When you have finished setting

the open number-of-points parameter, close it by
pressing Edit Points again or by making another
menu selection.
Now, press Start Cal to begin automatically taking
power level correction information at each frequency
point. During this process the menu displays the
status: Calibrating along with the current measure-
ment frequency point.

NOTE
To terminate the measurement process at
any time before completion, press Abort .

Once the power-offset table has been created, it is

stored in non-volatile memory. The power-offset ta-
ble is now ready to be applied to the test setup. Dis-
connect the Power Sensor and Power Meter from the
test setup.

Applying User Level Flatness Correction

Whenever user level flatness correction is applied to
the test setup by activating the power-offset table,
USER 1...5 the set power level is delivered at the point where
the calibration was performed.
When a power-offset table is se-
lected ON, this status message is To activate the selected power-offset table and apply
displayed on all menu displays to user level flatness correction to the test setup, press
remind the operator that user level On/Off . The User Level Cal menu will display the
flatness correction has been applied status: On.
to the ALC. To turn off the selected power-offset table and re-
move user level flatness correction from the test
setup, press On/Off again. The User Level Cal
menu will display the status: Off.

Entering a Power-Offset Table via GPIB

User level flatness correction can be applied to the
test setup using a power-offset table created from
calculated data and entered via the GPIB. Refer to
the 682XXB/683XXB GPIB Programming Manual
(P/N 10370-10286) for information and instructions
on creating a power-offset table and entering it via
the GPIB.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-61
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

Erasing the Power-Offset Tables from Memory

The power-offset tables are stored in non-volatile
memory. A master reset is required to erase the con-
tents of the tables and reprogram them with default
data.
To perform a master reset, proceed as follows:
NOTE
Step 1 With the 682XXB/683XXB in standby,
The master reset function over- press and hold the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF
writes all information stored in the key.
non-volatile memory with default
values. This includes the nine Step 2 Press the LINE OPERATE/STANDBY key
stored front panel setups. to turn the instrument on.

Step 3 When the first menu is displayed (after

the start-up display), release the RF OUT-
PUT ON/OFF key.

The contents of non-volatile memory have now been

erased and reprogrammed with default data.

3-62 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

3-12 SIGNAL MODULATION The signal generator provides AM, FM, FM (Option 6), and pulse
modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from either
the internal AM, FM, FM, and pulse generators or external sources.
FM and FM are operationally exclusive; therefore, only the AM, FM or
FM, and pulse modulation modes can be active simultaneously. The
following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions
for each modulation mode. Use the Amplitude Modulation Mode, Fre-
quency Modulation Mode, Phase Modulation Mode, and Pulse Modula-
tion Mode menu maps (Chapter 4, Figures 4-10, 4-11, 4-12, and 4-13)
to follow the menu sequences.

Amplitude The signal generator has two AM operating

Modulation modes—Linear AM and Log AM. In Linear AM
Operating mode, sensitivity is continuously variable from
Modes 0 %/V to 100 %/V. The amplitude of the RF output
changes linearly as the AM input changes.

In Log AM mode, sensitivity is continuously vari-

able from 0 dB/V to 25 dB/V. The amplitude of the
RF output changes exponentially as the AM input
changes.

Providing The following are the menu selections necessary to

Amplitude provide amplitude modulation of the output signal
Modulation using a modulating signal from both the internal
AM generator and an external source.

Press MODULATION . At the resulting menu dis-

play, press AM . The main AM Status Menu (below)
is displayed.

Now, press the menu soft-key More . The additional

AM Status Menu (on the following page) is dis-
played.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-63
LOCAL (FRONT LEVELING
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATIONS

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select the modulating signal source.
q Select the Linear AM or Log AM operating
mode.

Press Internal / External to select the source of the

modulating signal. Internal selects the modulating
signal from the internal AM generator; external se-
lects the modulating signal from an external source.
The AM status display will reflect your selection.

Press Log / Linear to select the AM operating mode.

When Internal AM is active, the AM Depth display
will reflect your selection as XX dB (Log) or XX %
(Linear). When External AM is active, the AM Sen-
sitivity display will reflect your selection as XX dB/V
(Log) or XX %/V (Linear).

Press Previous Menu to return to the main AM

Status Menu display.

Internal AM Source
Once you have pressed Internal / External to select
the internal AM generator as the modulating signal
source, the Internal AM Status Menu (below) is dis-
played.

3-64 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

This menu contains the internal AM status window

that shows the current menu selections. This menu
lets you perform the following:
q Turn AM on and off.
q Set the AM Depth.
q Set the AM Rate.
q Go to the Modulation Waveform Selection
menu.

Press On / Off to turn AM on and off. The Internal

AM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the AM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Int (On) or Off.

Press Edit Depth to open the AM Depth parameter,

then edit the current value using the cursor control
key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using
the keypad and the appropriate terminator key
(kHz/ms/STEPS for Linear; MHz/ms/dB for Log).The
AM Depth range is 0–100% in Linear and 0–25 dB
in Log. To close the open AM Depth parameter,
press Edit Depth or make another menu selection.

Reduce Rate Press Edit Rate to open the AM Rate parameter,

then edit the current value using the cursor control
This warning message is displayed key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using
when the AM Rate is set >100 kHz the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
for a non-sinewave modulating AM rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
waveform. Amplitude modulation 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
of the output signal will continue waveforms. To close the open AM Rate parameter,
but the modulating waveform may press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.
be distorted.
Press Mod. Wave to go to the Modulation Wave-
form Selection menu (below).

sine wave

square wave

positive ramp

negative ramp

GN Gaussian noise
This menu displays the modulation waveforms (on
the left) that are available from the AM generator.
UN uniform noise
Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired
modulation waveform, then press Select to select
triangle wave
it. The AM Status display will reflect your selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-65
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Press Previous Menu to return to the main AM

Status Menu display.

External AM Source
To provide amplitude modulation of the output sig-
nal using a modulating signal from an external
source, first set up the external signal generator and
connect it to either the 682XXB/683XXB front or
rear panel AM IN connector.
Next, go to the additional AM Status Menu (page
3-64) and press Internal / External to select the ex-
ternal source for the modulating signal. The Exter-
nal AM Status Menu (below) is then displayed.

This menu contains the external AM status window

that shows the current menu selections and the
measured AM Depth (The AM depth measurement
function measures the voltage of the external modu-
lation signal and calculates the percentage modula-
tion value). The menu lets you perform the
following:
q Turn AM on and off.
q Set the AM Sensitivity.
q Select the input impedance (600W or 50W) of
the input connector.
q Select the input connector (front panel or rear
panel AM IN) that is connected to the external
signal source.

Press On / Off to turn AM on and off. The External

ERR AM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the AM modulation status area will reflect
This error message is displayed
your selection as Ext (On) or Off.
when the external AM modulating
signal exceeds the input voltage
Press Edit Sens to open the AM Sensitivity pa-
range. The message “Reduce AM
rameter, then edit the current value using the cur-
Input Level” also appears at the
sor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new
bottom of the AM status display.
value using the keypad and the appropriate termi-
AM is turned off until the modulat-
nator key (kHz/ms/STEPS for Linear; MHz/ms/dB for
ing signal is within the input volt-
Log). The AM Sensitivity range is 0 %/V to 100 %/V
age range.

3-66 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

in Linear and 0 dB/V to 25 dB/V in Log. To close the

open AM Sensitivity parameter, press Edit Sens or
make another menu selection.

Press 600W / 50W to select the input impedance of

the input connector. The AM status display will re-
flect your selection.

Press Front / Rear to select the front panel or rear

panel AM IN connector. The AM status display will
reflect your selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-67
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Frequency The signal generator has four FM operating

Modulation modes—Locked, Locked Low-Noise, Unlocked Nar-
Operating row, and Unlocked Wide. In the Locked and Locked
Modes Low-Noise FM modes, frequency modulation of the
output signal is accomplished by summing the
modulating signal into the FM control path of the
YIG phase-lock loop.

In Locked FM mode, the maximum FM deviation is

the lesser of ±10 MHz or rate ´ 300 for 1 kHz to
8 MHz rates; in Locked Low-Noise FM mode, the
NOTE maximum FM deviation is the lesser of ±10 MHz or
Refer to Appendix B, page B-8, for rate ´ 3 for 50 kHz to 8 MHz rates.
the maximum FM deviation speci-
fications for 682X5B models. Refer In Unlocked FM modes, the YIG phase-lock loop is
to Appendix B, page B-18, for the disabled to allow for peak FM deviations of up to
maximum FM deviation specifica- 100 MHz. In Unlocked Narrow mode, frequency
tions for 683X5B models. modulation is obtained by applying the modulating
signal to the fine tuning coil of the YIG-tuned oscil-
lator. Unlocked Narrow FM mode allows maximum
deviations of ±10 MHz for DC to 8 MHz rates.

In Unlocked Wide mode, frequency modulation is ac-

complished by applying the modulating signal to the
main tuning coil of the YIG-tuned oscillator. Un-
locked Wide FM mode allows maximum deviations
of ±100 MHz for DC to 100 Hz rates.

Providing The following are the menu selections necessary to

Frequency provide frequency modulation of the output signal
Modulation using a modulating signal from both the internal
FM generator and an external source.

Press MODULATION . At the resulting menu dis-

play, press FM . The main FM Status Menu (below)
is displayed.

3-68 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Now, press the menu soft-key More . The additional

FM Status Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select the modulating signal source.
q Go to the FM Mode Selection menu.

Press Int / Ext to select the source of the modulating

signal. Int selects the modulating signal from the in-
ternal FM generator; Ext selects the modulating sig-
nal from an external source. The FM status display
will reflect your selection.

Press FM Modes to go to the FM Mode Selection

menu (below).

This menu lets you select the FM operating mode.

Press Locked LN to select the Locked Low-Noise

FM operating mode; press Locked to select the
UNLOCKED Locked FM operating mode; press Unlocked Narrow
When Unlocked Narrow FM or Un- to select theUnlocked Narrow FM operating mode;
locked Wide FM is selected ON, this or press Unlocked Wide to select the UnlockedWide
warning message is displayed on all FM operating mode. The FM status display will re-
menu displays to remind the opera- flect your selection.
tor that the carrier frequency is not
phase-locked. Press Previous Menu to return to the additional FM
Status Menu display.

At this display, press Previous Menu to return to

the main FM status display.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-69
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Internal FM Source
Once you have pressed Int / Ext to select the inter-
nal FM generator as the modulating signal source,
the Internal FM Status Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu contains the internal FM status window

that shows the current menu selections. This menu
lets you perform the following:
q Turn FM on and off.
q Set the FM Deviation.
q Set the FM Rate.
q Go to the Modulation Waveform Selection
menu.

Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The Internal

FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Int (On) or Off.

Press Edit Dev. to open the FM Deviation parame-

ter, then edit the current value using the cursor con-
trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value
using the keypad and the appropriate terminator
key. The FM Deviation range is 10 kHz to 20 MHz
for Locked, Locked Low-Noise, and Unlocked Nar-
row FM modes and 100 kHz to 100 MHz for Un-
locked Wide FM mode. To close the open FM
Deviation parameter, press Edit Dev. or make an-
other menu selection.
Reduce Rate
Press Edit Rate to open the FM Rate parameter,
This warning message is displayed then edit the current value using the cursor control
when the FM Rate is set >100 kHz key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using
for a non-sinewave modulating the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
waveform. Frequency modulation FM rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
of the output signal will continue 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
but the modulating waveform may waveforms. To close the open FM Rate parameter,
be distorted. press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.

3-70 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Press Mod. Wave to go to the Modulation Wave-

form Selection menu (below).

sine wave

square wave

positive ramp

negative ramp
This menu displays the modulation waveforms (on
GN Gaussian noise the left) that are available from the FM generator.
Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired
UN uniform noise modulation waveform, then press Select to select
it. The FM Status display will reflect your selection.
triangle wave
Press Previous Menu to return to the main FM
Status Menu display.

External FM Source
To provide frequency modulation of the output sig-
nal using a modulating signal from an external
source, first set up the external signal generator and
connect it to either the 682XXB/683XXB front or
rear panel FM IN connector.
Next, go to the additional FM Status Menu (page
3-69) and press Int / Ext to select the external
source for the modulating signal. The External FM
Status Menu (below) is then displayed.

This menu contains the external FM status window

that shows the current menu selections and the
measured FM Deviation (The FM deviation meas-
urement function measures the voltage of the exter-
nal modulation signal and calculates the peak
frequency deviation). The menu lets you perform the
following:

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-71
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

q Turn FM on and off.

q Set the FM Sensitivity.
q Select the input impedance (600W or 50W) of
the input connector.
q Select the input connector (front panel or rear
panel FM IN) that is connected to the external
signal source.

Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The External

FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Ext (On) or Off.

ERR Press Edit Sens to open the FM Sensitivity pa-

rameter, then edit the current value using the cur-
This error message is displayed sor control key or rotary data knob or enter an new
when the external FM modulating value using the keypad and the appropriate termi-
signal exceeds the input voltage nator key. The FM Sensitivity range is ±10 kHz/V
range. The message “Reduce FM In- to ±20 MHz/V for Locked, Locked Low-Noise, and
put Level” also appears at the bot- Unlocked Narrow FM modes and ±100 kHz/V to
tom of the FM status display. FM is ±100 MHz/V for Unlocked Wide FM mode. To close
turned off until the modulating sig- the open FM Sensitivity parameter, press Edit Sens
nal is within the input voltage or make another menu selection.
range.
Press 600W / 50W to select the input impedance of
the input connector. The FM status display will re-
flect your selection.

Press Front / Rear to select the front panel or rear

panel FM IN connector. The FM status display will
reflect your selection.

3-72 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Phase When Option 6 is added to the instrument, the

Modulation 682XXB/683XXB provides phase modulation (FM)
Operating of the output signal using modulating signals from
Modes either its internal FM generator or an external
source.

The 682XXB/683XXB has two FM operating modes

NOTE —Narrow FM and Wide FM. In Narrow FM mode,
Refer to Appendix B, page B-8, for the maximum FM deviation is the lesser of ±3 radi-
the maximum FM deviation speci- ans or ±5 MHz/rate for DC to 8 MHz rates. In Wide
fications for 682X5B models. Refer FM mode, the maximum FM deviation is the lesser
to Appendix B, page B-18, for the of ±400 radians or ±10 MHz/rate for DC to 1 MHz
maximum FM deviation specifica- rates.
tions for 683X5B models.
NOTE
FM and FM can not be active simultane-
ously. FM and FM share the same front
and rear panel input connectors and in-
ternal signal generator.

Providing The following are the menu selections necessary to

Phase provide phase modulation of the output signal using
Modulation a modulating signal from both the internal FM gen-
erator and an external source.

Press MODULATION. At the resulting menu dis-

play, press FM . The main FM Status Menu (below)
is displayed.

Now, press the menu soft-key More . The additional

FM Status Menu (below) is diaplayed.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-73
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select the modulating signal source.
q Select the FM operating mode (Narrow or
Wide).

Press Int / Ext to select the source of the modulating

signal. Int selects the modulating signal from the in-
ternal FM generator; Ext selects the modulating
signal from an external source. The FM status dis-
play will reflect your selection.

Next, select the FM operating mode. Press Narrow

to select the Narrow FM operating mode; press
Wide to select the Wide FM operating mode. The
FM status display will reflect your selection.

Press Previous Menu to return to the Main FM

Status Menu display.

Internal FM Source
Once you have pressed Int / Ext to select the inter-
nal FM generator as the modulating signal source,
the Internal FM Status Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu contains the internal FM status window

that shows you the current menu selections. This
menu lets you perform the following:
q Turn FM on and off.
q Set the FM Deviation.
q Set the FM Rate.
q Go to the Modulation Waveform Selection
menu.

Press On / Off to turn the FM on and off. The Inter-

nal FM status display will reflect your selection as
On or Off; the FM modulation status area will re-
flect your selection as Int (On) or Off.

Press Edit Dev. to open the FM Deviation parame-

ter, then edit the current value using the cursor con-

3-74 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value

using the keypad and the appropriate terminator
key. The FM Deviation range is 0.0025 to 5 radians
in Narrow FM mode and 0.25 to 500 radians in
Wide FM mode. To close the open FM Deviation pa-
rameter, press Edit Dev. or make another menu se-
lection.

Reduce Rate Press Edit Rate to open the FM Rate parameter,

then edit the current value using the cursor control
This warning message is displayed key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using
when the FM Rate is set >100 kHz the keypad and the appropriate terminator key. The
for a non-sinewave modulating FM Rate range is 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and
waveform. Phase modulation of the 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp
output signal will continue but the waveforms. To close the open FM Rate parameter,
modulating waveform may be dis- press Edit Rate or make another menu selection.
torted.
Press Mod. Wave to go to the Modulation Wave-
form Selection menu (below).

sine wave

square wave

positive ramp This menu displays the modulation waverforms (on

the left) that are available from the FM generator.
negative ramp Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired
modulation waveform, then press Select to select
GN Gaussian noise it. The FM Status display will reflect your selection.

UN uniform noise
Press Previous Menu to return to the main FM
Status Menu display.
triangle wave
External FM Source
To provide phase modulation of the output signal us-
ing a modulating signal from an external source,
first setup the external signal generator and connect
it to either the 682XXB/683XXB front or rear panel
FM/FM IN connector.

Next, go to the additional FM Status Menu (page

3-73) and press Int / Ext to select the external
source for the modulating signal. The External FM
Status Menu is then displayed.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-75
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

This menu contains the external FM status window

that shows the current menu selections and the
measured FM Deviation (The FM deviation meas-
urement function measures the voltage of the exter-
nal modulation signal and calculates the peak
frequency deviation). The menu lets you perform the
following:
q Turn FM on and off.
q Set the FM Sensitivity.
q Select the input impedance (600W or 50W) of
the input connector.
q Select the input connector (front panel or rear
panel FM/FM IN) that is connected to the ex-
ternal signal source.

Press On / Off to turn FM on and off. The External

FM status display will reflect your selection as On
or Off; the FM modulation status area will reflect
your selection as Ext (On) or Off.

Press Edit Sens to open the FM Sensitivity pa-

rameter, then edit the current value using the cur-
ERR sor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new
This error message is displayed value using the keypad and the appropriate termi-
when the external FM modulating nator key. The FM Sensitivity range is ±0.0025 radi-
signal exceeds the input voltage ans/V to ±5 radians/V for Narrow FM mode and
range. The message “Reduce FM ±0.25 radians/V to ±500 radians/V for Wide FM
Input Level” also appears at the bot- mode. To close the open FM Sensitivity parameter,
tom of the FM status display. FM is press Edit Sens or make another menu selection.
turned off until the modulating sig-
nal is within the input voltage Press 600W / 50W to select the input impedance of
range. the input connector. The FM status display will re-
flect your selection.

Press Front / Rear to select the front or rear panel

FM/FM IN connector. The FM status display will
reflect your selection.

3-76 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Pulse The 682XXB/683XXB provides pulse modulation of

Modulation the output signal using modulating signals from ei-
Operating ther its internal pulse generator or an external
Modes source.

The internal pulse generator has four pulse modes–

single, doublet (double pulse), triplet (triple pulse),
and quadruplet (quadruple pulse). Individual pulse
widths (W1, W2, W3, and W4) and delays (D1, D2,
D3, and D4) can be set for each of the pulses in a
mode.

PULSE
SYNC OUT PERIOD

W1 W2 W3 W4

OUTPUT

D1 D2 D3 D4

The internal pulse generator can be internally trig-

gered, externally triggered, internally and exter-
nally triggered with delay, and externally gated.
There is also a composite mode in which an external
pulse is summed with the internal pulse to pulse
modulate the output signal.

Whenever the internal pulse generator is internally

triggered, a TTL compatible signal that is synchro-
nized to the internal pulse modulation output is
available at the rear panel PULSE SYNC OUT con-
nector.

The internal pulse generator has two selectable

clock rates–40 MHz and 10 MHz. The 40 MHz clock
rate produces higher resolution pulses (25 ns) and
allows higher PRFs; the 10 MHz clock rate produces
lower resolution pulses (100 ns) and lower PRFs.

External signals or pulses to trigger or gate the in-

ternal pulse generator can be applied to either the
front panel or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN con-
nector.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-77
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Providing The following are the menu selections necessary to

Pulse provide pulse modulation of the output signal using
Modulation a modulating signal from both the internal pulse
generator and an external source.

Internal Pulse Source

Press MODULATION . At the resulting menu dis-
play, press Pulse . The Internal Pulse Status Menu
(below) is displayed.

This menu contains the internal pulse status win-

dow that shows the current menu selections. This
menu lets you perform the following:
ERR q Turn pulse modulation on and off.
q Set the pulse period (or PRF).
This error message is displayed
q Set the pulse widths (W1-W4) and delays (D1-
when a pulse parameter setting is
D4) in Single, Doublet, Triplet, and Quadru-
invalid for the current pulse modu-
plet pulse modes.
lation state. A listing of invalid pa-
q Set the parameters for the Step Delay mode.
rameter settings is provided in Ta-
q Go to an additional Internal Pulse Status
ble 6-2, beginning on page 6-8.
menu (to select the pulse mode, trigger mode,
and pulse configuration).

Press On / Off to turn pulse modulation on and off.

The Internal Pulse status display will reflect your
selection as On or Off.

Press Edit Period to open the Pulse Period parame-

ter. (If you had selected PRF instead of Period at the
NOTE Internal Pulse Configuration menu, the soft-key
At a 40 MHz pulse clock rate, the would read Edit PRF and pressing it would open
pulse period must be 125 ns longer the Pulse PRF parameter.) Edit the current value
than the pulse widths + delays; at a using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or
10 MHz pulse clock rate, the pulse enter a new value using the keypad and the appro-
period must be 500 ns longer than priate terminator key. To close the Pulse Period pa-
the pulse widths + delays. rameter, press Edit Period or make another menu
selection.

Press W/D List to display the list of current Pulse

Width (W1-W4) and Delay (D1-D4) parameter set-
tings. To change the current value of a parameter,

3-78 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

use the cursor control key to select the parameter,

NOTE
then press Edit . Edit the current value using the
Pulse Delay (D1) is only active cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a
when Delayed, Triggered w/delay, new value using the keypad and the appropriate
or Composite triggering mode is se- terminator key. To close the open parameter, press
lected. Edit or Previous Menu .

When the Delayed or Triggered w/delay trigger

mode is selected, the menu display adds the soft-key
Step Delay . This soft-key lets you access menus for
setting the step delay parameters and turning the
Stepped Delay Mode on and off. The Stepped Delay
Mode is described on page 3-83.

Press More to go to the additional Internal Pulse

Status menu (below).

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select the modulating signal source.
q Go to the Pulse Mode Selection menu.
q Go to the Trigger Mode Selection menu.
q Go to the Internal Pulse Configuration menu.

Press Internal / External to select the source of the

modulating signal. Internal selects the modulating
signal from the internal pulse generator; external
selects the modulating signal from an external
source. The Pulse status display will reflect your se-
lection.

Press Mode to go to the Pulse Mode Selection menu

(below).

3-79
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

This menu displays the pulse modes (Single, Dou-

blet, Triplet, and Quadruplet) that are available
from the pulse generator. Use the cursor control key
to highlight the desired pulse mode, then select it by
pressing Select . The Internal Pulse Status display
will reflect your selection.

Press Previous Menu to return to the previous In-

ternal Pulse Status Menu display.

At the additional Internal Pulse Status menu, press

Trigger to go to the Trigger Mode Selection menu
(below).

This menu lets you select the mode of triggering the

internal pulse generator. (Each trigger mode is de-
scribed and illustrated on page 3-81.)

Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired

trigger mode, then press Select to select it. The In-
ternal Pulse Status display will reflect your selec-
tion.

When you select the Gated, Triggered, or Triggered

w/delay mode, the menu display adds the menu
soft-keys Trig. ­ and Trig. ¯. Press these keys to
select whether the pulse generator is triggered by
the rising or falling edge of the external trigger
pulse.

Press Previous Menu to return to the previous In-

ternal Pulse Status Menu display.

3-80 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Free Run–The pulse generator produces Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadru-

plet pulse modulation waveforms at the internal pulse repetition rate. Pulse de-
FREE RUN
lay (D1) is not available in this trigger mode.
PULSE
SYNC OUT
Delayed–The pulse generator produces Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet
pulse modulation waveforms delayed by pulse delay (D1) at the internal pulse
repetition rate. OUTPUT

DELAYED
Triggered–The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to produce
Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms. Pulse de-
PULSE
lay (D1) is not available in this trigger mode. SYNC OUT

D1
Triggered w/delay–The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to OUTPUT
D1

produce Single, Doublet, Triplet, or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms de-

layed by pulse delay (D1). TRIGGERED

Gated– An external pulse gates the internal pulse generator on and off. When EXTERNAL
TRIGGER
gated on, the pulse generator produces a Single pulse modulation waveform at
the internal pulse repetition rate. Doublet, Triplet, and Quadruplet pulse modes
are not available in this trigger mode. OUTPUT

TRIGGERED W/DELAY
NOTE
For proper operation, the period of the external pulse must be greater
than the sum of the pulse repetition rate and pulse width of the EXTERNAL
TRIGGER
internal pulse modulation waveform. To prevent relative timing jitter,
the external gating pulse source can be synchronized with the
D1 D1 D1
internal pulse generator by using the 10 MHz REF OUT signal output OUTPUT

(682XXB/683XXB rear panel) as a frequency reference for the

external generator. GATED

Composite–In this mode, an external pulse triggers the internal pulse genera- EXTERNAL
PULSE
tor and also pulse modulates the RF output signal. The internal pulse generator
produces a Single pulse (W1) delayed by pulse delay (D1) which also pulse
OUTPUT
modulates the RF output signal. This effectively sums the external and internal
pulses to pulse modulate the output signal. Doublet, Triplet, and Quadruplet COMPOSITE
pulse modes are not available in this trigger mode.
EXTERNAL
PULSE

PULSE
SYNC OUT

D1 W1
INTERNAL
PULSE

OUTPUT

Figure 3-5. Pulse Modulation Triggering Modes

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-81
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

At the additional Internal Pulse Status menu, press

Config. to go to the Internal Pulse Configuration
menu (below).

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select the display of PRF or Period on the In-
ternal Pulse status display.
q Select the polarity of the signal (Low or High)
that turns the RF on.
q Select the pulse generator’s clock rate (40 MHz
or 10 MHz).
q Select the input connector (front panel or rear
panel PULSE TRIGGER IN) that is connected to
the external trigger pulse source.

Press PRF / Period to select the display of Pulse

PRF or Pulse Period on the Internal Pulse Status
display.

Press L RF On / H RF On to select the polarity of

the signal (Low or High) that turns the RF on. The
Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selec-
tion.

Press Clock 40 / 10 to select the pulse generator’s

clock rate (40 MHz or 10 MHz). The soft-key label is
highlighted (in reverse video) to reflect your selec-
tion.

Press Front / Rear to select the front or rear panel

PULSE TRIGGER IN connector. The soft-key label is
highlighted (in reverse video) to reflect your selec-
tion.

Press Top Menu to return to the main Internal

Pulse Status Menu.

3-82 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

Stepped Delay Mode

The Stepped Delay Mode lets you automatically in-
crement or decrement the Pulse Delay 1 (D1) value
according to step delay parameters. The mode is
only available when the Delayed or Triggered w/de-
lay triggering mode is selected. Selecting either trig-
gering mode adds the soft-key Step Delay to the
Internal Pulse Status Menu.

At the Internal Pulse Status Menu (page 3-78),

press Step Delay to access the Step Delay Mode
menu (below).

This menu lets you turn step delay on/off and edit
the step delay parameters.

Press On/Off to turn the Stepped Delay Mode on

and off.

Press Start Delay to open the Delay 1 (D1) start

time parameter.
NOTE Press End Delay to open the Delay 1 (D1) end time
If the Step Delay parameters that parameter.
are set result in a fractional
number of increments, then the last Press Step Size to open the step size time parame-
(fractional) one is not taken. ter.

Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit

the current value using the cursor control key or the
rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or make another menu
selection.

Press More to go to the additional Step Delay Mode

menu, shown on the following page.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-83
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

This menu lets you set the length of time a Delay 1

(D1) time is applied before it is incremented or dec-
remented by the step size.

Press Step Time to open the dwell-time-per-step pa-

rameter, then edit the current value using the cur-
sor contol key or rotary data knob or enter a new
value using the keypad and appropriate termination
key. To close the open parameter, press Step Time
or make another menu selection.

Press Previous Menu to return to the previous Step

Delay Menu display.

Press Top Menu to return to the Internal Pulse

Status Menu display.

Start Delay and End Delay times may be from lower

to higher times or vice versa.

The Step Size time will be applied as an increment

or a decrement as appropriate.

During pulse modulation when the step delay mode

is on, both Start Delay and End Delay times are er-
ror checked as Delay 1 (D1) times, in the usual man-
ner against other pulse parameters. Step Size time
is checked against the Start Delay and End Delay
times and must be no greater than the difference be-
tween Start Delay and End Delay.

3-84 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SIGNAL
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

External Pulse Source

To provide pulse modulation of the output signal us-
ing a modulating signal from an external source,
first set up the external pulse generator and connect
it to either the 682XXB/683XXB front or rear panel
PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.
Next go to the additional Internal Pulse Status
Menu (page 3-79) and press Internal / External to se-
lect the external source for the modulating signal.
The External Pulse Status Menu (below) is then dis-
played.

This menu contains the external pulse status win-

down that shows the current menu selections. This
menu lets you perform the following:
q Turn pulse modulation on and off.
q Select the modulating signal source.
q Select the polarity of the signal (Low or High)
that turns the RF on.
q Select the input connector (front panel or rear
panel PULSE TRIGGER IN) that is connected to
the external pulse source.

Press On / Off to turn pulse modulation on and off.

The External Pulse status display will reflect your
selection as On or Off; the Pulse modulation status
area will reflect your selection as Ext (On) or Off.

Press Internal / External to select the source of the

modulating signal. The Pulse status display will re-
flect your selection.

Press L RF On / H RF On to select the polarity of

the signal (Low or High) that turns the RF on. The
External Pulse Status display will reflect your selec-
tion.

Press Front / Rear to select the front or rear panel

PULSE TRIGGER IN connector. The External Pulse
Status display will reflect your selection.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-85
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

3-13 SYSTEM The system configuration function provides menus that let you set or
CONFIGURATION select instrument configuration items; for example, display intensity,
frequency scaling, polarity of blanking and video marker outputs, RF
on or off during retrace or between steps,GPIB operating parameters,
external interface language, and increment sizes for frequency, power
level, and time parameters. Use the System Configuration menu map
(Chapter 4, Figure 4-14) to follow the menu sequences.

To go to the System Configuration menu, first press SYSTEM . At the

System Menu display, press Config . The System Configuration Menu
( below) is displayed.

This menu lets you go to the Front Panel, Rear Panel, RF, GPIB, and
Increment Configuration menus.

3-86 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Configuring Configuring the front panel of the signal generator

the Front involves adjusting the intensity level of the data dis-
Panel play and setting the frequency scaling as required.

To go to the Configure Front Panel menu from the

System Configuration menu, press Front Panel .
The Configure Front Panel Menu (below) is dis-
played.

Display Intensity
Press Brite (repeatedly) to increase the intensity of
the data display to the desired level.
Press Dim (repeatedly) to decrease the intensity of
the data display.

Frequency Scaling
Frequency scaling lets you set a reference multiplier
value and apply it to all frequency parameters. The
reference multiplier can be any value between 0.1
and 14. Changing the multiplier value changes the
entered and displayed frequencies, but it does not
affect the output of the signal generator.
For example:
NOTE Frequency scaling set to 4
Resetting the 682XXB/683XXB CW frequency set to 20 GHz
sets the frequency scaling reference 682XXB/683XXB output frequency is 5 GHz
multiplier value to 1. (20 GHz ¸ 4)
Press Freq Scaling to open the reference multiplier
parameter. then edit the current value using the
cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a
new value using the data entry key pad and any ter-
minator key. To close the open multiplier parameter,
press Freq Scaling or make another menu selection.

When done, press Previous Menu to return to the

System Configuration menu.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-87
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Configuring Configuring the rear panel of the signal generator

the Rear consists of selecting the polarity of the retrace
Panel blanking, bandswitch blanking, retrace penlift, and
video marker outputs.

To go to the Configure Rear Panel menu from the

System Configuration menu, press Rear Panel . The
Configure Rear Panel Menu (below) is displayed.

Press Blanking +/– to select a +5V or –5V level for

the retrace and bandswitch blanking outputs. The
retrace blanking and bandswitch blanking signal
outputs are both available at the rear panel AUX I/O
connector. The display will reflect your selection.

Press Penlift to select normally-open (N/O) or

normally-closed (N/C) contacts on the internal pen-
lift relay. The penlift relay output, optionally avail-
able at the rear panel, is used to lift a plotter pen
during retrace.The display will reflect your selec-
tion.

Press Marker +/– to select a +5V or –5V level for

the video marker output when video markers are se-
lected ON. The video marker signal output is avail-
able at the rear panel AUX I/O connector. The
display will reflect your selection.

When done, press Previous Menu to return to the

System Configuration menu.

3-88 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Configuring Configuring the RF of the 682XXB/683XXB involves

the RF the following:

q Selecting whether the RF should be on or off

during retrace.
q Selecting whether the RF should be on or off
during frequency switching in CW and step
sweep modes.
q Selecting whether a sweep triggered by a sin-
gle or external trigger should rest at the top or
bottom of the sweep ramp.
q Selecting whether the RF should be on or off at
reset.
q Selecting 40 dB or 0 dB of attenuation when
RF is switched off in units with a step attenua-
tor (Option 2) installed.

To go to the Configure RF menu (below) from the

System Configuration menu, press RF .

Press Retrace RF to select RF On or Off during re-

trace. The display will reflect your selection.

Press Delta-F RF to select RF On or Off during fre-

quency switching in CW or step sweep modes. The
display will reflect your selection.

Press Ramp Rest to select 0 or 10 for the ramp rest

point for sweeps triggered a single or external trig-
ger. 0 indicates that the sweep will rest at the bot-
tom of the sweep ramp; 10 indicates that the sweep
will rest at the top of the sweep ramp. The display
will reflect your selection.

Press More to go to the Additional Configure RF

menu for more selections.

Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con-

figuration Menu display.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-89
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Additional Configure RF Menu

When you press More , the Additional Configure RF
Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Select whether the RF should be on or off at re-

set.
q Select 40 dB or 0 dB of attenuation when RF is
switched off in units with a step attenuator
(Option 2) installed.

NOTE Press Reset State to select RF On or Off at reset.

The display will reflect your selection.
The Term RF Off selection is only
available in those 682XXB models
Press Term RF Off to select 40 dB (minimum) of at-
having Option 2 and Firmware Ver-
tenuation when RF is switched off in units with a
sion 2.44 and above; 682X5B mod-
step attenuator (Option 2) installed. This provides a
els having Option 2 and Firmware
better output source match. The display will reflect
Version 1.33 and above; 683XXB
On to indicate the 40 dB of attenuation is applied.
models having Option 2 and Firm-
Press Term RF Off again to select 0 dB of attenua-
ware Version 2.55 and above; and
tion when RF is switched off. This display will re-
683X5B models having Option 2
flect Off to indicate 0 dB of attenuation is applied.
and Firmware Version 1.37 and
above.
Press Previous Menu to return to the main Configu-
ration RF Menu display.

3-90 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Configuring The GPIB configuration menus let you select the fol-
the GPIB lowing:

q The GPIB address and the GPIB line termina-

tor for the signal generator.
q The source lock mode for operation with a
Anritsu Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer.
NOTE
q The model and GPIB address for the power
The HP8757D Scalar selection is meter that is used to create a user level flat-
only available in those 682XXB ness correction power-offset table.
models having Firmware Version q The external interface language for remote op-
2.42 and above; 682X5B models eration of units with Option 19.
having Firmware Version 1.31 and q Scalar mode for operation with a Giga-tronics
above; 683XXB models having Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer or a
Firmware Version 2.53 and above; Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network
and 683X5B models having Firm- Analyzer.
ware Version 1.35 and above.
To go to the Configure GPIB menu from the System
Configuration menu, press GPIB . The Configure
GPIB Menu (below) is displayed.

Press GPIB Address to change the address of the

682XXB/683XXB on the bus (the default GPIB ad-
dress is 5). Enter a new address, between 1 and 30,
using the cursor control key or the data entry key-
pad and the terminator key

Hz
ns
ADRS

The new GPIB address will appear on the display.

Press Line Term to select a carriage return (CR) or

a carriage return and line feed (CR/LF) as the GPIB
data delimiter. Consult the GPIB controller’s man-
ual to determine which data delimiter is required.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-91
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Press SS Mode to turn on the source lock mode for

SS MODE operation with a Anritsu Model 360B Vector Net-
When SS Mode is selected on, this work Analyzer. (Refer to paragraph 7-4 for informa-
message is displayed (in the fre- tion pertaining to operating the 682XXB/683XXB
quency mode title bar) on all menu with a 360B VNA.) Press SS Mode again to turn off
displays to remind the operator the source lock mode.
that the 682XXB/683XXB is in a
source lock mode. Press More to go to the First Additional Configure
GPIB menu for more selections.

Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con-

figuration menu.

First Additional Configure GPIB Menu

When you press More , the First Additional Config-
ure GPIB menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you select the following:

q The model and GPIB address for the power
meter that is used to create a user level flat-
ness correction power-offset table. (Refer to
page 3-57 for a description of this function.)
q The external interface language for remote op-
eration of 682XXB/683XXBs with Option 19 in-
stalled. (Refer to page 2-9 for more informa-
tion.)
Press Pwr Mtr Address to change the address of the
power meter on the GPIB (the default GPIB address
is 13). Enter a new address, between 1 and 30, using
the cursor control key or the data entry keypad and
the terminator key
Hz
ns
ADRS
The new GPIB address will appear on the display.
Press Pwr Mtr Select to select the power meter
model being used. (Supported power meters are the
Anritsu ML4803A and Hewlett-Packard 437B,
438A, and 70100A.)

3-92 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Press Native SCPI to select the external interface

language to be used for remote operation of the
682XXB/683XXB. (Language selection is only avail-
able on instruments that have Option 19 installed.)
Press More to go to the Second Additional Configu-
ration GPIB Menu display.
Press Previous Menu to return to the main Config-
ure GPIB menu display.

Second Additional Configure GPIB Menu

When you press More the Second Additional Con-
figure GPIB Menu (below) is displayed.

This menu lets you select the following:

q Scalar mode of operation with a Giga-tronics
Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer.
q Scalar mode of operation with a Hewlett
Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Ana-
lyzer.
Press 8003 Scalar to enable operations with a
Giga-tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer.
(Refer to paragraph 7-5 for procedures.) Press
8003 Scalar again to disable the operation.
Press 8757D Scalar to enable operations with a
Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Ana-
lyzer. (Refer to paragraph 7-6 for procedures.) Press
8757D Scalar again to disable the operation.
Press Previous Menu to return to the First Addi-
tional Configure GPIB Menu display.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-93
LOCAL (FRONT SYSTEM
PANEL) OPERATION CONFIGURATION

Setting The Increment menu lets you set the incremental

Increment size for editing frequency, power level, and time pa-
Sizes rameters. When the increment mode is selected on,
these parameter values will increase or decrease by
the set amount each time the Ù or Ú pad is pressed
or the rotary data knob is turned clockwise or
counter-clockwise. The menu also lets you turn the
increment mode on and off.

To go to the Increment menu from the System Con-

figuration menu, press Incr Menu . The Increment
Menu (below) is displayed.

Press Freq Incr to open the frequency increment pa-

rameter.

Press Level Incr to open the power level increment

parameter.

Press Time Incr to open the time increment pa-

rameter.

Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit

the current value using the cursor control key or ro-
tary data knob or enter a new value using the key
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.

Press Incr Mode to turn the increment mode on.

Press again to turn it off.

When done, press Previous Menu to return to the

System Configuration menu.

3-94 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SAVING/RECALLING
PANEL) OPERATION INSTRUMENT SETUPS

3-14 SAVING/RECALLING The 682XXB/683XXB offers the capability to store up to ten complete
INSTRUMENT SETUPS front panel setups. The setups are numbered 0 through 9. The follow-
ing paragraphs describe how to save and recall front panel setups.

Saving Once you have decided that an instrument setup

Setups should be retained for future use, follow the proce-
dure below to save it.

First, press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.

Now, press Setups . The Setups Menu (below) is dis-

played.

Press Save , then enter the desired setup number

(between 0 and 9) on the keypad. The setup is now
saved.

NOTE
Setup #0 automatically saves the current
front panel settings when the instrument
is shutdown using the front panel LINE
key. Therefore, it is recommended that
you use only setups #1 through #9 to save
front panel setups.

When instrument shutdown occurs be-

cause of main power interruptions, the
current front panel settings are not
saved.

Recalling To recall a previously saved setup, first access the

Setups Setups Menu as described above.

At the Setups Menu, press Recall , then enter the

setup number on the keypad.

The instrument resets itself to the recalled configu-

ration.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-95
LOCAL (FRONT SAVING/RECALLING
PANEL) OPERATION INSTRUMENT SETUPS

Erasing The front panel setups are stored in non-volatile

Stored Setups memory. A master reset is required to erase the con-
tents of the setups and reprogram them with default
data.

To perform a master reset, proceed as follows:

NOTE
Step 1 With the 682XXB/683XXB in standby,
The master reset function over- press and hold the RF OUTPUT ON/OFF
writes all information stored in the key.
non-volatile memory with default
values. This includes the five Step 2 Press the LINE OPERATE/STANDBY key
power-offset tables used for the to turn the instrument on.
user level flatness correction func-
tion. Step 3 When the first menu is displayed (after
the start-up display), release the RF OUT-
PUT ON/OFF key.

The contents of non-volatile memory have now been

erased and reprogrammed with default data.

3-96 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT SECURE
PANEL) OPERATION OPERATION

3-15 SECURE OPERATION The 682XXB/683XXB can be operated in a secure mode of operation.
In this secure mode, the display of all frequency, power level, and
modulation parameters is disabled during both local (front panel) and
remote (GPIB) operations. The instrument will continue to function
normally in all other respects. The following paragraphs describe how
to place the signal generator in secure mode and how to return to nor-
mal operation.

To place the 682XXB/683XXB in the secure mode,

first press SYSTEM to display the System Menu.

Next, press Secure . This places the signal genera-

tor in the secure mode and the Secure Menu (below)
is displayed.

NOTE
During secure mode, all main menu keys
and menu soft-keys operate normally. The
menu soft-key labels are displayed and
change with menu selections. Only the
parameter display is disabled.

To return the 682XXB/683XXB to unsecured (nor-

mal) operation, press SYSTEM , then press Reset .

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-97
LOCAL (FRONT SCAN
PANEL) OPERATION MODULATION

3-16 SCAN MODULATION The internal scan modulator, added by Option 20, lets you amplitude
(OPTION 20) modulate output signals from 1 to 20 GHz at modulation depths up to
60 dB. Scan modulation is accomplished using a modulating signal
from an external source and is in addition to the normal amplitude
modulation described in paragraph 3-12.

To provide amplitude modulation of the output sig-

nal using the internal scan modulator, first set up
the external modulating signal generator and con-
nect it to the 682XXB/683XXB rear panel SCAN
MOD IN connector.

Next, press MODULATION , then Scan to go to the

Scan Status Menu (below).

Press On/Off to turn scan modulation on and off.

The Scan status display and the Scan modulation
status area will reflect your selection as On or Off.

Control the scan modulation depth by varying the

level of the external modulating signal. (Since the
scan modulator has a fixed sensitivity of –10 dB/V,
an external modulating signal level of 6 volts pro-
duces the maximum modulation depth of –60 dB.)

3-98 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT INTERNAL
PANEL) OPERATION POWER METER

3-17 INTERNAL POWER The internal power meter function, added by Option 8, lets you meas-
METER (OPTION 8) ure the power from a test device and display its value in the lower
right corner of the level parameters area of the front panel LCD. The
internal power meter has a range of +16 dBm to –35 dBm and is com-
patible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, and 6400-71 series detectors.

To make a measurement of the power from a test de-

vice using the internal power meter function, first
connect the detector to the test device and to the
rear panel POWER METER connector.

Next, press the SYSTEM main menu key. At the

System Menu display (below), press Meas. Power
to enable the power measurement function.

NOTE
During operation, the word Pwr Under-
range is displayed to indicate an under-
range condition; the word Pwr Overrange
is displayed to indicate an overrange con-
dition.

To disable the power measurement function, press

Meas. Power again.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-99
LOCAL (FRONT REFERENCE
PANEL) OPERATION OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION

3-18 REFERENCE The reference oscillator calibration function lets you calibrate the in-
OSCILLATOR ternal 100 MHz crystal reference oscillator of the 682XXB/683XXB us-
CALIBRATION ing an external 10 MHz, 0 to +10 dBm reference signal.

NOTE
NOTES Before beginning calibration, always let
the 682XXB/683XXB warm up for a mini-
1. The calibration function is only
mum of 120 hours.
available in those 682XXB models
having Firmware Version 2.44 and
To perform calibration of the internal reference os-
above; 682X5B models having
cillator, first connect the external 10 MHz reference
Firmware Version 1.33 and above;
signal to the 682XXB/683XXB rear panel 10 MHz
683XXB models having Firmware
REF IN connector.
Version 2.55 and above; and
683X5B models having Firmware
Next, press the SYSTEM main menu key. At the
Version 1.37 and above.
System Menu display, press Cal Menu to go to the
2. This calibration is not applicable Calibration Menu (below).
to units having Option 16, High
Stability Time Base, installed.

Press Refrnce Cal to begin calibration.

Press Previous Menu to return to the System Menu

display.

When Refrnce Cal is pressed, the Calibration

Status Menu (below) is displayed.

Press Proceed to start the calibration.

Press Abort to cancel the calibration and return to

the Calibration Menu display.

3-100 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL (FRONT REFERENCE
PANEL) OPERATION OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION

When Proceed is pressed, the date parameter

opens for data entry.

Using the key pad, enter the current date (in any
desired format). Then, press any terminator key.
The Calibration Status Menu display changes to in-
dicate calibration is in progress.

When the reference oscillator calibration is com-

plete, the Calibration Menu is displayed.

External Reference Not Connected

If calibration is attempted without an external
10 MHz reference signal connected to the rear panel
10 MHz REF IN connector, the Calibration Status
Menu displays the following.

682XXB/683XXB OM 3-101/3-102
 Chapter 4
Local Operation–Menu Maps

Table of Contents

4-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2 MENU MAP DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
 Chapter 4
Local Operation–Menu Maps
4-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides menu maps that support the 682XXB/683XXB
front panel operating instructions found in Chapter 3. It includes
menu maps for all of the frequency, power level, and modulation
modes of operation. In addition, a menu map for system configuration
is also provided.

4-2 MENU MAP A menu map shows the menu key selections and instrument menu dis-
DESCRIPTION plays for a particular mode of signal generator operation. The menu
displays are shown as they appear on the instrument and are linked
together to show the sequence of menu selection. A brief description of
the function of each menu’s soft-keys is provided. If a menu soft-key
selects another menu, then it is shown linked to that menu. Figure
4-1, on page 4-5, is a sample menu map annotated to identify the key
elements.

The following is a list of the menu maps contained in this chapter.

Figure Title Page

4-1 Sample Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4-2 CW Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3 Analog Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4 Step Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map. . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . 4-9
4-6 Fixed Power Level Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7 CW Power Sweep Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode Menu Map . . . . 4-12
4-9 Leveling Modes Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-10 Amplitude Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-11 Frequency Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-12 Phase Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-13 Pulse Modulation Mode Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-14 System Configuration Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-3/4-4
LOCAL OPERATION SAMPLE
–MENU MAPS MENU MAP

Main Menu Key Cursor A Main Typical Menu Soft-Key Points To The Menu Displayed Whenever
(Indicates The Active Menu Display Functional Description The Menu Soft-Key Is Depressed
Main Menu Key)

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Current
FREQUENCY Frequency
CONTROL

Main LEVEL/ALC
To Master-Slave
Menu
SELECT Menu (Not Shown)
LEVEL
Keys CONTROL Edit Current
MODULATION Power Level CW Ramp On/Off
SYSTEM Set The
Sweep Time
Indicates That Pressing This
Main Menu Key While In The
Current Mode Displays The Mode Soft-Keys
Parameter Control Menu (Appearance Changes
To Show Current Selection)

CW/SWEEP
Edit Current Tag/Untag Highlighted
SELECT Frequency Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit Highlighted
LEVEL/ALC
Frequency
SELECT
Output Highlighted
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current Frequency
Main Menu MODULATION Power Level
Key Cursor SYSTEM

Preset Parameter Soft-Keys

(Appearance Changes
To Show Current Selection)
Output Next
Tagged Frequency
Output Previous
Tagged Frequency
Edit Current
Power Level

Note: In Most Cases, Pressing a Menu Soft-Key

That Controls a Menu Function Turns The
Function ON; pressing the Key Again Turns
The Function OFF. The Key Labels Change
Appearance to Show the ON/OFF Condition.

Figure 4-1. Sample Menu Map (Annotated)

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-5
 LOCAL OPERATION CW
–MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Current
FREQUENCY Frequency
CONTROL Edit Highlighted
LEVEL/ALC Frequency
SELECT
Set Slave
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current DF Frequency Set Slave Frequency
Power Level Set Slave Main Offset in 360B VNA Mode
MODULATION
Power Level Set Slave Power Level
SYSTEM Set Slave Alternate in 360B VNA Mode
Power Level
Master - Slave
On/Off
* Press CW to Return to Previous Menu

On/Off
Set The
Sweep Time

CW/SWEEP
Edit Current Tag/Untag Highlighted
SELECT Frequency Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit Highlighted
LEVEL/ALC
Frequency
SELECT
Output Highlighted NOTES
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current Frequency
Power Level 1. Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-7 for
MODULATION
CW Frequency Mode operating instruc-
SYSTEM
tions.

2. Refer to Chapter 7, paragraph 7-2 for

Master-Slave operating instructions.

Output Next 3. Analog Sweep Frequency Mode is not

Tagged Frequency
available on Series 682XXB Synthe-
Output Previous sized Signal Generators.
Tagged Frequency
Edit Current
Power Level

Figure 4-2. CW Frequency Mode Menu Map

4-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION ANALOG SWEEP
–MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit Current
LEVEL Edit Current Sweep Time
CONTROL
Power Level
MODULATION On / Off
SYSTEM On / Off
On / Off
Triggers
Single Sweep

Edit Alt Sweep

Start Frequency
Edit Alt Sweep
✱ Can Be Selected Stop Frequency
From Any Analog
Menu Display

On / Off

Edit Main Sweep

Power Level
Edit Alt Sweep
Power Level

CW/SWEEP
NOTES
SELECT Edit Start Frequency 1. Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-8 for
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency Analog Sweep Frequency Mode oper-
✱ LEVEL/ALC Tag/Untag Highlighted
SELECT
Marker Frequency ating instructions.
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current Edit Highlighted
MODULATION
Power Level Marker Frequency 2. Analog Sweep Frequency Mode is not
On/Off
SYSTEM available on Series 682XXB Synthe-
On/Off sized Signal Generators.

Figure 4-3. Analog Sweep Frequency Mode

Menu Map

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-7
 LOCAL OPERATION STEP SWEEP
–MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
Edit Dwell
Time
LEVEL Edit Current
CONTROL
Power Level Edit Step
MODULATION Size On / Off
Edit Number
SYSTEM
of Steps On / Off
On / Off

Edit Alt Sweep

Start Frequency
Edit Alt Sweep
✱ Can Be Selected Stop Frequency
From Any Step Sweep
Menu Display
On / Off

Edit Main Sweep

Power Level
Edit Alt Sweep
Power Level

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency NOTES
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency
1. Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-8 for
✱ LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
Tag/Untag Highlighted Step Sweep Frequency Mode operat-
Marker Frequency ing instructions.
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current Edit Highlighted
MODULATION Power Level Marker Frequency
N/A 2. Analog Sweep Frequency Mode is not
SYSTEM
On/Off available on Series 682XXB Synthe-
sized Signal Generators.

Figure 4-4. Step Sweep Frequency Mode

Menu Map

4-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION MANUAL SWEEP
–MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit Step Size
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Number of Steps
MODULATION

SYSTEM

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Frequency
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Current
MODULATION
Power Level
SYSTEM

NOTES
1. Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-8 for
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode operat-
ing instructions.

2. Analog Sweep Frequency Mode is not

available on Series 682XXB Synthe-
sized Signal Generators.

Figure 4-5. Manual Sweep Frequency Mode

Menu Map

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-9
 LOCAL OPERATION FIXED POWER
–MENU MAPS LEVEL MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Current
FREQUENCY Power Level
CONTROL

LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

LEVEL
Edit Power
CONTROL Level Offset
MODULATION
On/Off
SYSTEM Level Offset *

* Display Showing Level Offset On

CW/SWEEP
Edit Current Tag/Untag Highlighted
SELECT Power Level Power Level
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit Highlighted
LEVEL/ALC
Power Level
SELECT
Output Highlighted
LEVEL
CONTROL Power Level
MODULATION

SYSTEM

Output Next
Tagged Power Level
Output Previous
Tagged Power Level

NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-9 for
Fixed Power Level Mode operating in-
structions.

Figure 4-6. Fixed Power Level Mode Menu

Map

4-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION CW POWER
–MENU MAPS SWEEP MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Power Level
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Power Level
LEVEL/ALC Edit Dwell TIme
SELECT

LEVEL Edit Step Size

CONTROL On/Off
Edit Number of Steps
MODULATION
On/Off
SYSTEM
On/Off

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Power Level
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Power Level
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT NOTE
LEVEL
CONTROL
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-10
MODULATION
for CW Power Sweep Mode operating
instructions.
SYSTEM

Figure 4-7. CW Power Sweep Mode Menu

Map

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-11
 LOCAL OPERATION SWEEP FREQUENCY/
–MENU MAPS STEP POWER MODE

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Power Level
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Power Level
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT N/A
LEVEL
CONTROL Edit Step Size
MODULATION
Edit Number of Steps
SYSTEM
N/A

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Power Level
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit End Power Level
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT

LEVEL
CONTROL

MODULATION

SYSTEM

NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-10 for
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode
operating instructions.

Figure 4-8. Sweep Frequency/Step Power

Mode Menu Map

4-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION LEVELING
–MENU MAPS MODES

Selects Internal ALC

CW/SWEEP
(Default Mode)
SELECT
FREQUENCY
CONTROL
Selects External ALC
Selects Front Panel (External Detector Input)
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
External ALC Input Selects External ALC
LEVEL
CONTROL
(Power Meter Input)
Selects Rear Panel
MODULATION External ALC Input Selects ALC Off
SYSTEM

Edit Current Power Level

Decouple The Attenuator
From The ALC Level
Press To Increase
Attenuation (10dB Steps)
Press To Decrease
Attenuation (10dB Steps)

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Adjust the External ALC
FREQUENCY
CONTROL ALC Slope On/Off
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit The ALC Slope
LEVEL
CONTROL
Edit The Pivot Point
MODULATION

SYSTEM

Menu Display with ALC Loop Selected

CW/SWEEP
SELECT Edit Start Frequency
FREQUENCY
CONTROL
Edit End Frequency
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
Edit Number Of Points
LEVEL
CONTROL
Selected Offset Table On/Off
MODULATION
Starts Calibration To Create
SYSTEM Offset Table
NOTE
* Menu Display with User Cal Selected Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-11 for
Leveling Modes operating instruc-
tions.

Figure 4-9. Leveling Modes Menu Map

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-13
 LOCAL OPERATION AMPLITUDE
–MENU MAPS MODULATION MODE

INTERNAL AM SOURCE SELECTED

Select Modulation
Waveform

CW/SWEEP
SELECT AM On/Off
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit AM Depth
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit AM Rate
LEVEL
CONTROL

MODULATION

SYSTEM

Internal AM Source or
External AM Source
Log AM (0-25dB/V) or
Linear AM (0-100%/V)

EXTERNAL AM SOURCE SELECTED

CW/SWEEP
Internal AM Source or
SELECT AM On/Off External AM Source
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit AM Sensitivity Log AM (0-25dB/V) or
LEVEL/ALC 600 or 50 Linear AM (0-100%/V)
NOTE SELECT
Input Impedance
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-12 LEVEL
CONTROL
Front Panel Input or
for AM Mode operating instruc- MODULATION Rear Panel Input
tions. SYSTEM

Figure 4-10. Amplitude Modulation Mode

Menu Map

4-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION FREQUENCY
–MENU MAPS MODULATION MODE

INTERNAL FM SOURCE SELECTED

Select Modulation
Waveform

CW/SWEEP
SELECT FM On/Off
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit FM Deviation
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit FM Rate
LEVEL
CONTROL

MODULATION

SYSTEM

Internal FM Source or Selects Locked

External FM Source Low-Noise FM
Selects Locked FM
Selects Unlocked Narrow FM
Selects Unlocked Wide FM

NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-12
for FM Mode operating instructions.

EXTERNAL FM SOURCE SELECTED

Internal FM Source or
CW/SWEEP
SELECT FM On/Off External FM Source Selects Locked
Low-Noise FM
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit FM Sensitivity Selects Locked FM
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT
600 or 50 Selects Unlocked Narrow FM
LEVEL
Input Impedance
CONTROL
Front Panel Input or Selects Unlocked Wide FM
MODULATION Rear Panel Input
SYSTEM

Figure 4-11. Frequency Modulation Mode

Menu Map

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-15
 LOCAL OPERATION PHASE
–MENU MAPS MODULATION MODE

INTERNAL M SOURCE SELECTED

Select Modulation
Waveform

CW/SWEEP
SELECT M On/Off
FREQUENCY
CONTROL
Edit M Deviation
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT Edit M Rate
LEVEL
CONTROL

MODULATION

SYSTEM

Internal M Source or
External M Source
Selects Narrow M Mode
Selects Wide M Mode

EXTERNAL M SOURCE SELECTED

CW/SWEEP
M On/Off Internal M Source or
SELECT
External M Source
FREQUENCY
CONTROL Edit M Sensitivity Selects Narrow M Mode
LEVEL/ALC
SELECT 600 or 50
NOTE Input Impedance Selects Wide M Mode
LEVEL
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-12 CONTROL
Front Panel Input or
for FM Mode operating instructions. MODULATION Rear Panel Input
SYSTEM

Figure 4-12. Phase Modulation Mode (Option 6)

Menu Map

4-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
LOCAL OPERATION PULSE
–MENU MAPS MODULATION MODE

NOTE
Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-12
for Pulse Modulation Mode operat-
ing instructions.

Figure 4-13. Pulse Modulation Mode Menu

682XXB/683XXB OM 4-17
 LOCAL OPERATION SYSTEM
–MENU MAPS CONFIGURATION

C W /S W E E P
S E L E C T B r ig h te n s T h e D is p la y
F R E Q U E N C Y
C O N T R O L D im s T h e D is p la y
L E V E L /A L C
S E L E C T S e t R e fe r e n c e M u ltip lie r
L E V E L
C O N T R O L

M O D U L A T IO N

S Y S T E M

S e le c t + 5 V o r -5 V L e v e l F o r R e tra c e
a n d B a n d s w itc h B la n k in g
S e le c t N o r m a lly O p e n o r C lo s e d
P e n L ift R e la y C o n ta c ts
S e le c t + 5 V o r -5 V le v e l
fo r V id e o M a rk e rs

S e le c t R F O n o r O ff
D u r in g R e tr a c e S e le c t R F O n o r O ff a t R e s e t
S e le c t R F O n o r O ff D u r in g F re q u e n c y S e le c t 4 0 d B o r 0 d B A tte n u a tio n
S w itc h in g In C W a n d S te p M o d e s W h e n R F S w itc h e d O ff ( U n its
S e le c t R e s t F o r S in g le S w e e p , 0 F o r B o tto m W ith O p tio n 2 O n ly )
o f S w e e p R a m p , 1 0 F o r T o p o f S w e e p R a m p

S e le c t G P IB A d d r e s s S e t P o w e r M e te r A d d re s s 8 0 0 3 S c a la r M o d e O n /O ff
S e le c t C R o r C R /L F L in e T e r m in a to r S e le c t P o w e r M e te r T y p e H P 8 7 5 7 D S c a la r M o d e O n /O ff
S e le c t In te rfa c e L a n g u a g e
S S M o d e O n /O ff (O p tio n 1 9 O n ly )

In c re m e n t M o d e O n /O ff
NOTE S e t F re q u e n c y In c re m e n t

Refer to Chapter 3, paragraph 3-13 S e t P o w e r L e v e l In c re m e n t

for System Configuration operating S e t T im e In c r e m e n t

instructions.

Figure 4-14. System Configuration Menu

Map

4-18 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Chapter 5
Operation Verification

Table of Contents

5-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2 TEST EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3 TEST RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-4 INITIAL 681XXB/683XXB CHECKOUT . . . . . . . 5-4
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Resetting the Signal Generator . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warmup Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-5 CW FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-6 POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS
TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure . . . . . . 5-14
Power Level Flatness Test Procedure . . . . . . 5-15
 Chapter 5
Operation Verification
5-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter contains three tests that can be used to verify the opera-
tion of the Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generators.

Setup instructions and performance procedures are included for each

test. The results can be compared with the specified limits that are
shown on the test record forms that are provided for each test.

5-2 TEST EQUIPMENT Table 5-1 lists the recommended test equipment for performing the
operation verification tests in this chapter.

Table 5-1. Recommended Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specification Recommended Manufacturer/Model

Frequency Range: 0.01 to 65 GHz EIP Microwave, Inc. Models 538B,

Counter, Input Z: 50W 548B, or 578B,
with Resolution: 1 Hz with
Cable Kit Other: External Time Base Cable Kit: Option 590
and Input and
External Mixer External Mixer:
Option 91 (26.5 to 40 GHz)
Option 92 (40 to 60 GHz)
Option 93 (60 to 90 GHz)

Power Meter, Range: –30 to +20 dBm Hewlett-Packard Model 437B,

with (1mW to 100 mW) with
Power Power Sensor:
Sensor HP 8487A (0.01 to 50 GHz)

Oscilloscope Bandwidth: DC to 150 MHz Tektronix, Inc. Model TAS485

Vertical Sensitivity: 2 mV/ di-
vision
Horiz Sensitivity: 50 ns/ divi-
sion

Adapter K (male) to 2.4 mm (female) Hewlett-Packard

Adapts the Power Sensor, Part Number: HP 11940D
HP 8487A, to the 682XXB/
683XXB RF OUTPUT con-
nector (£40 GHz models)

5-3 TEST RECORDS Tables 5-2 and 5-3 contain test record forms that can be copied and
used to record the results of operational verification testing of your
682XXB/683XXB. These tables are included as part of the operational

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-3
OPERATION INITIAL 682XXB/
VERIFICATION 683XXB CHECKOUT

verification test procedures and contain test information for all

682XXB/683XXB models.

5-4 INITIAL 682XXB/683XXB Before starting the operation verification tests in this chapter, perform
CHECKOUT an initial checkout of the 682XXB/683XXB to be tested. This initial
checkout consists of applying power to the signal generator, verifying
that it passes self-test, and resetting it to the factory default parame-
ters.

Power Up First, verify that the rear panel line voltage selector
is set for the correct line voltage, then connect the
682XXB/683XXB to the power source. This auto-
matically places the signal generator in operation
(front panel OPERATE LED on).

During power up, the signal generator loads its op-

erating program then returns to the exact setup it
was in when last turned off.

Self Test Next, perform a self-test of the signal generator to

insure proper operation of the instrument PCBs and
other internal assemblies.

To self-test the instrument, first press SYSTEM ,

then press Selftest . When the self-test is complete,
the signal generator displays the main CW menu.

NOTE
Error conditions detected during self-test
are displayed as error messages on the
data display. They should be corrected be-
fore continuing. Refer to Chapter 6 for a
listing of error messages and descriptions.

Resetting the The 682XXB/683XXB should be reset to the factory-

Signal selected default parameters before commencing op-
Generator eration verification testing.

To reset the instrument, first press SYSTEM , then

press Reset . The signal generator resets to the CW
frequency mode and displays the CW Menu.

Warmup Time When the signal generator is turned on, allow one
hour of warmup time before performing operational
verification testing. This will assure stable opera-
tion of the instrument.

5-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

5-5 CW FREQUENCY The following test verifies that the CW frequency output of the signal
ACCURACY TEST generator is within accuracy specifications. Table 5-2, beginning on
page 5-7, contains test records that you can copy and use to record test
results for this test. Test records for standard 682XXB/683XXB models
are contained in Table 5-2A ; test records for 682XXB/683XXB models
with Option 11 are contained in Table 5-2B.

682XXB/683XXB FREQUENCY COUNTER

Band 3 Band 4
10 MHz 10 MHz Input Input
REF OUT EXT IN

Connection B
RF IN
Band 2
Input
RF OUT

(26.5 to 65 GHz)
Mixer

Connection A (0.01 to 26.5 GHz)

Figure 5-1. Equipment Setup for CW Frequency Accuracy Test

Test Setup Connect the equipment, shown in Figure 5-1, as fol-

lows:

Step 1 Connect the 682XXB/683XXB rear panel

10 MHz REF OUT to the Frequency
Counter 10 MHz External Reference in-
put. If the Frequency Counter has an
INT/EXT toggle switch, set it to EXT.

Step 2 Connect the 682XXB/683XXB RF OUT-

PUT to the Frequency Counter RF Input
as follows:
a. For measuring frequencies of 0.01 to
1.0 GHz, connect to the Band 2 input
(Connection A).
b. For measuring frequencies of 1.0 to
26.5 GHz, connect to the Band 3 input
(Connection A).
c. For measuring frequencies of 26.5 to
65.0 GHz, connect to the Band 4 input
as shown in Connection B using the
appropriate waveguide mixer; Option
91 (26.5 to 40 GHz), Option 92 (40 to
60 GHz), or Option 93 (60 to 90 GHz).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-5
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Test The following procedure tests both the coarse and

Procedure fine loops to verify the accuracy of the CW frequency
output.

Step 1 Set up the 682XXB/683XXB as follows:

a. Reset the instrument by pressing
SYSTEM , then Reset . Upon reset,
the CW Menu (below) is displayed.

b. Press Edit F1 to open the current fre-

quency parameter for editing.
c. Set F1 to the first test frequency for
the model being tested (Table 5-2A is
the test record for standard models;
Table 5-2B for models with Option 11).

Step 2 Verify that the Frequency Counter read-

ing meets specifications (±100 Hz of the
value shown on the test record for stan-
dard models; ±10 Hz for instruments with
Option 11).

Step 3 Record the Frequency Counter reading on

the test record (Table 5-2A or Table 5-2B).

NOTE
The Frequency Counter reading is
typically within ±1 Hz. Differences
of a few Hertz can be caused by
noise or counter limitations. Differ-
ences of ³±100 Hz (³±10 Hz for in-
struments with Option 11) indicate
a frequency synthesis problem.

Step 4 Set F1 to the next test frequency on the

test record and record the Frequency
Counter reading.

Step 5 Repeat step 4 until all frequencies listed

on the test record have been recorded.

5-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Table 5-2A. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Standard Models) (1 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68237B / 68337B, 68245B / 68345B, 68253B / 68353B, 68255B / 68355B,

68247B / 68347B 68259B / 68359B

2.000 000 000* _____________________ 2.000 000 000* _____________________

5.000 000 000 _____________________ 5.000 000 000 _____________________
8.000 000 000 _____________________ 8.000 000 000 _____________________
11.000 000 000 _____________________ 11.000 000 000 _____________________
14.000 000 000 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 _____________________
17.000 000 000 _____________________ 17.000 000 000 _____________________
20.000 000 000 _____________________ 20.000 000 000 _____________________
23.000 000 000 _____________________
26.500 000 000 _____________________
2.000 001 000 _____________________
2.000 002 000 _____________________
2.000 003 000 _____________________ 2.000 001 000 _____________________
2.000 004 000 _____________________ 2.000 002 000 _____________________
2.000 005 000 _____________________ 2.000 003 000 _____________________
2.000 006 000 _____________________ 2.000 004 000 _____________________
2.000 007 000 _____________________ 2.000 005 000 _____________________
2.000 008 000 _____________________ 2.000 006 000 _____________________
2.000 009 000 _____________________ 2.000 007 000 _____________________
2.000 010 000 _____________________ 2.000 008 000 _____________________
2.000 009 000 _____________________
2.000 010 000 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±100 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-7
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Table 5-2A. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Standard Models) (2 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68263B / 68363B, 68265 / 68365B,

68275B / 68375B and 68277B / 68377B
68269B / 68369B

2.000 000 000* _____________________ 2.000 000 000* _____________________

5.000 000 000 _____________________ 6.000 000 000 _____________________
8.000 000 000 _____________________ 10.000 000 000 _____________________
11.000 000 000 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 _____________________
14.000 000 000 _____________________ 18.000 000 000 _____________________
17.000 000 000 _____________________ 22.000 000 000 _____________________
20.000 000 000 _____________________ 26.000 000 000 _____________________
23.000 000 000 _____________________ 30.000 000 000 _____________________
26.000 000 000 _____________________ 34.000 000 000 _____________________
29.000 000 000 _____________________ 38.000 000 000 _____________________
32.000 000 000 _____________________ 42.000 000 000 _____________________
35.000 000 000 _____________________ 46.000 000 000 _____________________
38.000 000 000 _____________________ 50.000 000 000 _____________________
40.000 000 000 _____________________

2.000 001 000 _____________________ 2.000 001 000 _____________________

2.000 002 000 _____________________ 2.000 002 000 _____________________
2.000 003 000 _____________________ 2.000 003 000 _____________________
2.000 004 000 _____________________ 2.000 004 000 _____________________
2.000 005 000 _____________________ 2.000 005 000 _____________________
2.000 006 000 _____________________ 2.000 006 000 _____________________
2.000 007 000 _____________________ 2.000 007 000 _____________________
2.000 008 000 _____________________ 2.000 008 000 _____________________
2.000 009 000 _____________________ 2.000 009 000 _____________________
2.000 010 000 _____________________ 2.000 010 000 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±100 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

5-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Table 5-2A. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Standard Models) (3 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68285B / 68385B and 68287B / 68387B 68295B / 68395B and 68297B/ 68397B

2.000 000 000* _____________________ 2.000 000 000* _____________________

6.000 000 000 _____________________ 6.000 000 000 _____________________
10.000 000 000 _____________________ 10.000 000 000 _____________________
14.000 000 000 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 _____________________
18.000 000 000 _____________________ 18.000 000 000 _____________________
22.000 000 000 _____________________ 22.000 000 000 _____________________
26.000 000 000 _____________________ 26.000 000 000 _____________________
30.000 000 000 _____________________ 30.000 000 000 _____________________
34.000 000 000 _____________________ 34.000 000 000 _____________________
38.000 000 000 _____________________ 38.000 000 000 _____________________
42.000 000 000 _____________________ 42.000 000 000 _____________________
46.000 000 000 _____________________ 46.000 000 000 _____________________
50.000 000 000 _____________________ 50.000 000 000 _____________________
54.000 000 000 _____________________ 54.000 000 000 _____________________
58.000 000 000 _____________________ 58.000 000 000 _____________________
60.000 000 000 _____________________ 62.000 000 000 _____________________
65.000 000 000 _____________________

2.000 001 000 _____________________ 2.000 001 000 _____________________

2.000 002 000 _____________________ 2.000 002 000 _____________________
2.000 003 000 _____________________ 2.000 003 000 _____________________
2.000 004 000 _____________________ 2.000 004 000 _____________________
2.000 005 000 _____________________ 2.000 005 000 _____________________
2.000 006 000 _____________________ 2.000 006 000 _____________________
2.000 007 000 _____________________ 2.000 007 000 _____________________
2.000 008 000 _____________________ 2.000 008 000 _____________________
2.000 009 000 _____________________ 2.000 009 000 _____________________
2.000 010 000 _____________________ 2.000 010 000 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±100 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-9
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Table 5-2B. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Models with Option 11) (1 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68237B / 68337B, 68245B / 68345B, 68253B / 68353B, 68255B / 68355B,

68247B / 68347B 68259B / 68359B

2.000 000 000 0* _____________________ 2.000 000 000 0* _____________________

5.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 5.000 000 000 0 _____________________
8.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 8.000 000 000 0 _____________________
11.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 11.000 000 000 0 _____________________
14.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 0 _____________________
17.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 17.000 000 000 0 _____________________
20.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 20.000 000 000 0 _____________________
23.000 000 000 0 _____________________
26.500 000 000 0 _____________________
2.000 000 100 0 _____________________
2.000 000 200 0 _____________________
2.000 000 300 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 100 0 _____________________
2.000 000 400 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 200 0 _____________________
2.000 000 500 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 300 0 _____________________
2.000 000 600 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 400 0 _____________________
2.000 000 700 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 500 0 _____________________
2.000 000 800 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 600 0 _____________________
2.000 000 900 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 700 0 _____________________
2.000 001 000 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 800 0 _____________________
2.000 000 900 0 _____________________
2.000 001 000 0 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

5-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Figure 5-2B. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Models with Option 11) (2 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68263B / 68363B, 68265B / 68365B,

68275B / 68375B and 68277B / 68377B
68269B / 68369B

2.000 000 000 0* _____________________ 2.000 000 000 0* _____________________

5.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 6.000 000 000 0 _____________________
8.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 10.000 000 000 0 _____________________
11.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 0 _____________________
14.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 18.000 000 000 0 _____________________
17.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 22.000 000 000 0 _____________________
20.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 26.000 000 000 0 _____________________
23.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 30.000 000 000 0 _____________________
26.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 34.000 000 000 0 _____________________
29.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 38.000 000 000 0 _____________________
32.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 42.000 000 000 0 _____________________
35.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 46.000 000 000 0 _____________________
38.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 50.000 000 000 0 _____________________
40.000 000 000 0 _____________________

2.000 000 100 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 100 0 _____________________

2.000 000 200 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 200 0 _____________________
2.000 000 300 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 300 0 _____________________
2.000 000 400 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 400 0 _____________________
2.000 000 500 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 500 0 _____________________
2.000 000 600 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 600 0 _____________________
2.000 000 700 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 700 0 _____________________
2.000 000 800 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 800 0 _____________________
2.000 000 900 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 900 0 _____________________
2.000 001 000 0 _____________________ 2.000 001 000 0 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-11
OPERATION CW FREQUENCY
VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST

Table 5-2B. CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record (for Models with Option 11) (3 of 3)

Model 68_ _ _ B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

68285B / 68385B and 68287B / 68387B 68295B / 68395B and 68287B / 68397B

2,000 000 000 0* _____________________ 2,000 000 000 0* _____________________

6.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 6.000 000 000 0 _____________________
10,000 000 000 0 _____________________ 10,000 000 000 0 _____________________
14.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 14.000 000 000 0 _____________________
18.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 18.000 000 000 0 _____________________
22.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 22.000 000 000 0 _____________________
26.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 26.000 000 000 0 _____________________
30.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 30.000 000 000 0 _____________________
34.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 34.000 000 000 0 _____________________
38.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 38.000 000 000 0 _____________________
42.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 42.000 000 000 0 _____________________
46.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 46.000 000 000 0 _____________________
50.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 50.000 000 000 0 _____________________
54.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 54.000 000 000 0 _____________________
58.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 58.000 000 000 0 _____________________
60.000 000 000 0 _____________________ 62.000 000 000 0 _____________________
65.000 000 000 0 _____________________

2.000 000 100 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 100 0 _____________________

2.000 000 200 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 200 0 _____________________
2.000 000 300 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 300 0 _____________________
2.000 000 400 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 400 0 _____________________
2.000 000 500 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 500 0 _____________________
2.000 000 600 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 600 0 _____________________
2.000 000 700 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 700 0 _____________________
2.000 000 800 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 800 0 _____________________
2.000 000 900 0 _____________________ 2.000 000 900 0 _____________________
2.000 001 000 0 _____________________ 2.000 001 000 0 _____________________

* Specification for all frequencies listed above is ±10 Hz. All frequencies are in GHz.

5-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

5-6 POWER LEVEL These tests verify that the power level accuracy and flatness of the sig-
ACCURACY AND nal generator meet specifications. Table 5-3, beginning on page 5-19,
FLATNESS TESTS contains test records that you can copy and use to record test results
for these tests. Test records are provided for each 682XXB/683XXB
model configuration.

682XXB/683XXB OSCILLOSCOPE
HORIZ
OUT

RF CH 1 or X Input
OUT
Power POWER METER
Sensor

Figure 5-2. Equipment Setup for Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests

Test Setup Connect the equipment, shown in Figure 5-2, as fol-

lows:

Step 1 Calibrate the Power Meter with the

Power Sensor.

Step 2 Connect the Power Sensor to the RF OUT-

PUT of the 682XXB/683XXB.

NOTE
For £40 GHz models, use the K
(male) to 2.4 mm (female) adapter
to connect the Power Sensor to the
RF OUTPUT connector.

Step 3 Connect the 682XXB/683XXB rear panel

HORIZ OUT to the Oscilloscope CH.1 in-
put (X input).

NOTE
Before starting these procedures,
locate the test record in Table 5-3
for the particular 682XXB/683XXB
model configuration being tested.

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-13
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Power Level Power level accuracy is checked by stepping the

Accuracy Test power down in 1 dB increments from its maximum
Procedure rated power level.

Step 1 Set up the 682XXB/683XXB as follows:

a. Reset the instrument by pressing
SYSTEM , then Reset . The CW
Menu (below) is displayed.

b. Press Edit F1 to open the current fre-

quency parameter for editing.
c. Set F1 to the CW frequency noted on
the test record for the model being
tested.
d. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
e. Set L1 to the power level noted on the
test record.

Step 2 Measure the output power level with the

Power Meter and record the reading on
the test record.

Step 3 Verify that the Power Meter reading

meets the specifications stated on the test
record.

Step 4 Set L1 to the next test power level. Re-

cord the Power Meter reading on the test
record.

Step 5 Repeat step 4 for the other levels listed on

the test record for the current CW fre-
quency.

Step 6 Repeat steps 1 thru 5 for all CW frequen-

cies listed on the test record.

5-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Power Level Power level flatness is checked by measuring the

Flatness Test power level variation during a full band sweep; first
Procedure in the step sweep mode (682XXB/683XXB models),
then in the analog sweep mode (683XXB models
only).

Step 1 Set up the 682XXB/683XXB as follows for

a step sweep power level flatness test.
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
SYSTEM , then Reset . The CW
Menu is displayed.
b. Press Step to place the instrument in
the step sweep frequency mode and
display the Step Sweep Menu (below).

c. With the Step Sweep menu displayed,

press the main menu key

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

The Sweep Frequency Control menu

(below) is displayed.

d. Press Full to select a full range fre-

quency sweep.
e. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
f. Set L1 to the power level noted on the
test record.

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-15
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

g. Now, return to the Step Sweep menu

by pressing the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

h. At the Step Sweep menu, press

Sweep Ramp to go to the Step Sweep
Ramp menu (below).

i. Press Dwell Time to open the dwell

time-per-step parameter for editing.
j. Set the dwell time to 1 second.

NOTE
Monitor the 682XXB/683XXB’s
Horizontal Output on the Oscillo-
scope to determine sweep start and
stop.

Step 2 As the 682XXB/683XXB steps through

the full frequency range, measure the
maximum and minimum Power Meter
readings and record the values on the test
record. Verify that the variation (differ-
ence between the maximum and mini-
mum readings) does not exceed the value
noted on the test record.

NOTE
This concludes power level testing for se-
ries 682XXB signal generators. For series
683XXB signal generators, continue on to
step 3 to test power level flatness in the
analog sweep mode.

5-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Step 3 Set up the 683XXB as follows for an ana-

log sweep power level flatness test:
a. Reset the instrument by pressing
SYSTEM , then Reset . The CW
Menu is displayed.
b. Press Analog to place the 683XXB in
the analog sweep frequency mode and
display the Analog Sweep Menu.

c. With the Analog Sweep menu dis-

played, press the main menu key

FREQUENCY
CONTROL

The Sweep Frequency Control menu

(below) is displayed.

d. Press Full to select a full range fre-

quency sweep.
e. Press Edit L1 to open the current
power level parameter for editing.
f. Set L1 to the power level noted on the
test record.
g. Now, return to the Analog Sweep
menu by pressing the main menu key

CW/SWEEP
SELECT

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-17
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

h. At the Analog Sweep menu, press the

menu soft-key Sweep Ramp to go to
the Analog Sweep Ramp menu.

i. Press Sweep Time to open the sweep

time parameter for editing.
j. Set the sweep time to 99 seconds.

NOTE
Monitor the 683XXB’s Horizontal
Output on the Oscilloscope to de-
termine sweep start and stop.

Step 4 During the analog sweep, measure the

maximum and minimum Power Meter
readings and record the values on the test
record. Verify that the variation (differ-
ence between the maximum and mini-
mum readings) does not exceed the value
noted on the test record.

5-18 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (1 of 46)

Model 68_37B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68237B/68337B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68337B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-19
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (2 of 46)

Model 68_37B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68237B/68337B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68337B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

5-20 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (3 of 46)

Model 68_37B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68237B/68337B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power

+17 dBm _________dBm

+16 dBm _________dBm

+15 dBm _________dBm

+14 dBm _________dBm

+13 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+17 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68337B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+17 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-21
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (4 of 46)

Model 68_37B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68237B/68337B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power

+15 dBm _________dBm

+14 dBm _________dBm

+13 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+15 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68337B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+15 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

5-22 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (5 of 46)

Model 68_45B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68245B/68345B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68345B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-23
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (6 of 46)

Model 68_45B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68245B/68345B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68345B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

5-24 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (7 of 46)

Model 68_45B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68245B/68345B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +17 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +16 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +15 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +14 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 12dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 7dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68345B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-25
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (8 of 46)

Model 68_45B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68245B/68345B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +15 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +14 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68345B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (typical, not a specification).

5-26 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (9 of 46)

Model 68_47B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68247B/68347B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68347B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-27
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (10 of 46)

Model 68_47B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68247B/68347B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68347B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-28 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (11 of 46)

Model 68_47B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68247B/68347B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +17 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +16 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +15 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +14 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 12dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 7dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68347B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+13 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-29
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (12 of 46)

Model 68_47B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68247B/68347B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +15 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +14 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68347B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+11 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-30 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (13 of 46)

Model 68_53B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68253B/68353B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

– 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68353B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-31
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (14 of 46)

Model 68_53B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68253B/68353B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

– 3 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

– 4 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

– 5 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68353B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-32 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (15 of 46)

Model 68_53B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68253B/68353B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68353B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-33
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (16 of 46)

Model 68_53B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68253B/68353B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7.5 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68353B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-34 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (17 of 46)

Model 68_55B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68255B/68355B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68355B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-35
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (18 of 46)

Model 68_55B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68255B/68355B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68355B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-36 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (19 of 46)

Model 68_55B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68255B/68355B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68355B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-37
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (20 of 46)

Model 68_55B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68255B/68355B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 7.5 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68355B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-38 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (21 of 46)

Model 68_59B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68259B/68359B
(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 26.5 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68359B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz) 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-39
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (22 of 46)

Model 68_59B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68259B/68359B
(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 26.5 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68359B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-40 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (23 of 46)

Model 68_59B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68259B/68359B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 26.5 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68359B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 10 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-41
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (24 of 46)

Model 68_59B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68259B/68359B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2A Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 22.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 7.5 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 26.5 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68359B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 26.5 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-42 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (25 of 46)

Model 68_63B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68263B/68363B
(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 2dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

– 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68363B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-43
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (26 of 46)

Model 68_63B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68263B/68363B
(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

– 3 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

– 4 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68363B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-44 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (27 of 46)

Model 68_63B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68263B/68363B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68363B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-45
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (28 of 46)

Model 68_63B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68263B/68363B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68363B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (2 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-46 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (29 of 46)

Model 68_65B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68265B/68365B
(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68365B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-47
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (30 of 46)

Model 68_65B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68265B/68365B
(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68365B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz) 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-48 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (31 of 46)

Model 68_65B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68265B/68365B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68365B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-49
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (32 of 46)

Model 68_65B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68265B/68365B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68365B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-50 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (33 of 46)

Model 68_69B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68269B/68369B
(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz) 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68369B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-51
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (34 of 46)

Model 68_69B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68269B/68369B
(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz) 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68369B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz) 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-52 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (35 of 46)

Model 68_69B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68269B/68369B with Option 15B High Power

(without Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+13 dBm _________dBm +13 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm

+12 dBm _________dBm +12 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz) 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68369B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 6 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-53
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (36 of 46)

Model 68_69B w/Option 15B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68269B/68369B with Option 15B High Power

(with Option 2B Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 1.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+11 dBm _________dBm +11 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm

+10 dBm _________dBm +10 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 9 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 8 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm + 7 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm + 6 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm + 5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm + 4 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm + 3 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz) 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68369B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 3 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-54 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (37 of 46)

Model 68_75B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68275B/68375B
(without Option 2C Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 45.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB (0.5 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 50 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68375B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to 50 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-55
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (38 of 46)

Model 68_75B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68275B/68375B
(with Option 2C Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 45.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 8.5 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

– 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm

– 1.5 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm

– 2.5 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm

– 3.5 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm –13 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 1 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB (0.5 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 50 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68375B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 1 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 10.2 dB (40 to 50 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-56 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (39 of 46)

Model 68_77B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68277B/68377B
(without Option 2C Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 45.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 50 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68377B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to
50 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-57
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (40 of 46)

Model 68_77B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68277B/68377B
(with Option 2C Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 45.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 8.5 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

– 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm

– 1.5 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm

– 2.5 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm

– 3.5 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm –13 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 1 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 50 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68377B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 1 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 10.2 dB (40 to
50 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-58 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (41 of 46)

Model 68_85B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68285B / 68385B

(without Option 2D Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 10 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB (0.5 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 60 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68385B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to 60 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-59
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (42 of 46)

Model 68_85B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68285B / 68385B

(with Option 2D Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 8.5 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm

– 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm –10.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1.5 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm –11.5 dBm _________dBm

– 2.5 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm –12.5 dBm _________dBm

– 3.5 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm –13.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB (0.5 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 60 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68385B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 6.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 10.2 dB (40 to 60 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

5-60 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (43 of 46)

Model 68_87B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68287B / 68387B

(without Option 2D Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm + 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm + 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 10 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

+ 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 60 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68387B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

+ 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to
60 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-61
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (44 of 46)

Model 68_87B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68287B / 68387B

(with Option 2D Step Attenuator)

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+ 8.5 dBm _________dBm + 0 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm

+ 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm

– 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm –10.5 dBm _________dBm

– 1.5 dBm _________dBm –10 dBm _________dBm –11.5 dBm _________dBm

– 2.5 dBm _________dBm –11 dBm _________dBm –12.5 dBm _________dBm

– 3.5 dBm _________dBm –12 dBm _________dBm –13.5 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 60 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68387B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 7.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 6.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 8.2 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 10.2 dB (40 to
60 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-62 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (45 of 46)

Model 68_95B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68295B / 68395B

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 10 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 11 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 12 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 1.6 dB (0.5 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 65 GHz).

Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68395B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 2.0 dB (0.5 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to 65 GHz)(typical, not a
specification).

682XXB/683XXB OM 5-63
OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY
VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS

Table 5-3. Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record (46 of 46)

Model 68_97B Serial No. ____________________ Date ___________

Model 68297B / 68397B

Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy * Power Level Accuracy *

(CW Frequency = 5.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 25.0 GHz) (CW Frequency = 50.0 GHz)

Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power

+10 dBm _________dBm + 2.5 dBm _________dBm 0 dBm _________dBm

+ 9 dBm _________dBm + 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 1 dBm _________dBm

+ 8 dBm _________dBm + 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 2 dBm _________dBm

+ 7 dBm _________dBm – 0.5 dBm _________dBm – 3 dBm _________dBm

+ 6 dBm _________dBm – 1.5 dBm _________dBm – 4 dBm _________dBm

+ 5 dBm _________dBm – 2.5 dBm _________dBm – 5 dBm _________dBm

+ 4 dBm _________dBm – 3.5 dBm _________dBm – 6 dBm _________dBm

+ 3 dBm _________dBm – 4.5 dBm _________dBm – 7 dBm _________dBm

+ 2 dBm _________dBm – 5.5 dBm _________dBm – 8 dBm _________dBm

+ 1 dBm _________dBm – 6.5 dBm _________dBm – 9 dBm _________dBm

+ 0 dBm _________dBm – 7.5 dBm _________dBm – 10 dBm _________dBm

– 1 dBm _________dBm – 8.5 dBm _________dBm – 11 dBm _________dBm

– 2 dBm _________dBm – 9.5 dBm _________dBm – 12 dBm _________dBm

* Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.0 dB. * Specification is ±1.5 dB.

Power Level Flatness (Step Sweep)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation **

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 1.6 dB (0.05 to 40 GHz); 2.2 dB (40 to 65 GHz).
Power Level Flatness (Analog Sweep)(Model 68397B only)

Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation ***

– 2 dBm _________dBm __________dBm _________dB

*** Maximum variation is 4.0 dB (0.01 to 0.05 GHz); 2.0 dB (0.05 to 20 GHz); 4.0 dB (20 to 40 GHz); 5.0 dB (40 to
65 GHz)(typical, not a specification).

5-64 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Chapter 6
Operator Maintenance

Table of Contents

6-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-2 ERROR AND WARNING/STATUS MESSAGES. . . 6-3
Self-Test Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Normal Operation Error and Warning/Status
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-3 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning the Fan Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Cleaning the Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Replacing the Line Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
 Chapter 6
Operator Maintenance
6-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides the information necessary for operator mainte-
nance of the signal generator. Operator maintenance is limited to trou-
bleshooting and repairs that can be made without removing the in-
strument covers.

6-2 ERROR AND During normal operation, the 682XXB/683XXB generates error mes-
WARNING/STATUS sages to indicate internal malfunctions, abnormal signal generator op-
MESSAGES erations, or invalid signal inputs or data entries. It also displays warn-
ing messages to alert the operator to conditions that could result in
inaccurate signal generator output. In addition, status messages are
displayed to remind the operator of current menu selections or set-
tings.

Self-Test The 682XXB/683XXB firmware includes internal di-

Error agnostics that self-test the instrument. These self-
Messages test diagnostics perform a brief go/no-go test of most
of the instrument PCBs and other internal assem-
blies.
CAUTION
During self-test with RF OUTPUT set to ON, the output
power level is set to 0 dBm. Always disconnect sensitive
equipment from the unit before performing self-test.

You can perform an instrument self-test at any time

during normal operation by pressing SYSTEM and
then Selftest .

If the signal generator fails self-test, an error mes-

sage(s) is displayed on the front panel data display.
These error messages describe the malfunction and,
in most cases, provide an indication of what has
failed. Table 6-1, next page, is a summary listing of
the self-test error messages. Included for each is a
description of the probable cause(s), whether or not
the 682XXB/683XXB is still operable, and if oper-
able,what operational degradation can be expected.

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-3
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

WARNING
Self-test error messages normally indicate the failure of an
internal component or assembly of the CW generator. There
are no operator serviceable components inside. Refer servic-
ing of the instrument to qualified service technicians.

To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to preci-

sion components, do not remove the equipment covers.

Error Message Description/Remarks

Error 100 Indicates a calibration-related problem. Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the
DVM Ground Offset Failed instrument to a qualified service technician.

Error 101 Indicates either a calibration-related problem or a defective +10 Volt reference. Do
DVM Positive 10V Reference not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.

Error 102 Indicates either a calibration-related problem or a defective –10 Volt reference .
DVM Negative 10V Reference Do not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service techni-
cian.

Error 105 Indicates one or more of the voltages from the power supply are out of regulation.
Power Supply Voltage(s) out Do Not Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service techni-
of Regulation cian.

Error 106 Indicates the power supply is not phase-locked to the 400 kHz reference
Power Supply not Locked frequency. The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable in a degraded mode. The RF
output may contain more spurious signals than normal.

Error 107 Indicates the sweep timing is out of tolerance or has failed. If analog sweeps can
Sweep Time Check Failed be obtained, the 682XXB/683XXB is still operable in a degraded mode. If analog
sweeps can not be obtained, the 682XXB/683 is operable only in CW or step
sweep frequency modes.

Error 108 Indicates the 100 MHz crystal oven or the Option 16 high-stability 10 MHz crystal
Crystal Oven Cold oscillator has not reached operating temperature. The 682XXB/683XXB is still
operable, but frequency accuracy and stability may be degraded.

Error 109 Indicates the reference loop is not phase-locked to the external 10 MHz reference.
The 100MHz Reference is not The reference loop may phase-lock to the internal 100 MHz time base;
Locked to the External consequently, the 682XXB/683XXB would continue to operate normally.
Reference

Error 110 Indicates the reference loop is not phase-locked to the optional, high stability
The 100MHz Reference is not 10 MHz crystal oscillator. The reference loop may phase-lock to the internal
Locked to the High Stability 100 MHz time base; consequently, the 682XXB/683XXB would continue to
10MHz Crystal Oscillator operate normally.

Error 111 Indicates one or more of the oscillators within the fine loop is not phase-locked.
Fine Loop Osc Failed The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but the accuracy and stability of frequency
outputs are greatly reduced.

6-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Error Message Description/Remarks

Error 112 Indicates the coarse loop oscillator is not phase-locked. The 682XXB/683XXB is
Coarse Loop Osc Failed still operable but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly
reduced.

Error 113 Indicates the YIG loop is not phase-locked. The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable
Yig Loop Osc Failed but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced.

Error 114 Indicates the local oscillator in the down converter assembly is not phase-locked.
Down Converter LO not Locked The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but the accuracy and stability of frequency
outputs below 2 GHz is greatly reduced.

Error 115 Indicates failure of the not phase-locked indicator circuit. The 682XXB/683XXB is
Not Locked Indicator Failed still operable but an error message will not appear on the data display when the
output frequency is not phase-locked.

Error 116 Indicates FM loop has failed or the loop gain is out of tolerance. The 682XXB/
FM Loop Gain Check Failed 683XXB is still operable but frequency accuracy and stability are degraded.

Error 117 Indicates a failure of the Linearizer DAC on the A12 PCB. The 682XXB/683XXB is
Linearizer Check Failed still operable but frequency accuracy of the RF output is degraded.

Error 118 Indicates a failure of the Switchpoint DAC on the A12 PCB. The 682XXB is still
Switchpoint DAC Failed operable but will not generate a CW ramp. The 683XXB will not produce analog
sweeps but should operate normally in CW and step sweep modes.

Error 119 Indicates a failure of the center frequency circuitry on the A12 PCB. Do Not
Center Frequency Circuits Attempt to Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician.
Failed

Error 120 Indicates a failure of the ∆F Width DAC on the A12 PCB. The 683XXB will not
Delta-F Circuits Failed generate DF analog sweeps but should produce DF step sweeps.

Error 121 Indicates failure of the not leveled detector circuitry on the A10 PCB. The
Unleveled Indicator Failed 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but a warning message will not appear when the
RF output goes unleveled.

Error 122 Indicates a failure of the level reference circuitry on the A10 PCB. Use caution
Level Reference Failed and always determine the output power level when operating the
682XXB/683XXB in this condition.

Error 123 Indicates a failure of the level detector log amplifier circuitry on the A10 PCB. Use
Detector Log Amp Failed caution and always determine the output power level when operating the
682XXB/683XXB in this condition.

Error 124 Indicates a failure of both YIG-tuned oscillators. Do Not Attempt to Operate!
Full Band Unlocked and Unleveled Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician.

Error 125 Indicates a failure of the 8.4 to 20 GHz YIG-tuned oscillator. Do Not Attempt to
8.4 – 20 GHz Unlocked and Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician.
Unleveled

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-5
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Error Message Description/Remarks

Error 126 Indicates a failure of the 2 to 8.4 GHz YIG-tuned oscillator. Do Not Attempt to
2 – 8.4 GHz Unlocked and Operate! Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician.
Unleveled

Error 127 Indicates a failure of the level detector input circuitry on the A10 PCB. Use caution
Detector Input Circuit and always determine the output power level when operating the 682XXB/683XXB
Failed in this condition.

Error 128 Indicates a failure of the Down Converter leveling circuitry. The 682XXB/683XXB
.01 – 2 GHz Unleveled operates normally but will have unleveled RF output in the 0.01 – 2 GHz fre-
quency range.

Error 129 Indicates a failure of either the switched filter or level detector circuitry. The
Switched Filter or Level 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output. Use caution and always
Detector Failed determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 130 Indicates a failure in the 2 – 3.3 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
2 – 3.3 GH Switched Filter assembly. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this
frequency range. Use caution and always determine the output power level when
operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 131 Indicates a failure in the 3.3 – 5.5 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
3.3 – 5.5 GH Switched Filter assembly. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this
frequency range. Use caution and always determine the output power level when
operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 132 Indicates a failure in the 5.5 – 8.4 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter
5.5 – 8.4 GH Switched Filter assembly. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this
frequency range. Use caution and always determine the output power level when
operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 133 Indicates a failure in the 8.4 – 13.25 GHz switched filter path within the switched
8.4 – 13.25 GH Switched Filter filter assembly. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output in
this frequency range. Use caution and always determine the output power level
when operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 134 Indicates a failure in the 13.25 – 20 GHz switched filter path within the switched
13.25 – 20 GH Switched Filter filter assembly. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an RF output in
this frequency range. Use caution and always determine the output power level
when operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 135 Indicates a failure of the modulator in the switched filter assembly or the modulator
Modulator or Driver Failed driver circuitry on the A9 PCB. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not produce an
RF output. Use caution and always determine the output power level when
operating the instrument in this condition.

Error 138 Indicates a failure of the switched doubler module (SDM) or SDM bias regulator
SDM Unit or Driver Failed circuitry on the A14 PCB. The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but it will not
produce an RF output in the 20 – 40 GHz frequency range.

6-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Table 6-1. Self-Test Error Messages (4 of 4)

Error Message Description/Remarks

Error 139 Indicates a failure in the 32 – 40 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
32 – 40 GHz SDM Section Failed The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the
32 – 40 GHz frequency range.

Error 140 Indicates a failure in the 25 – 32 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
25 – 32 GHz SDM Section Failed The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the
25 – 32 GHz frequency range.

Error 141 Indicates a failure in the 20 – 25 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM.
20 – 25 GHz SDM Section Failed The 682XXB/683XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the
20 – 25 GHz frequency range.

Error 142 Indicates a failure of the sample and hold circuitry on the A10 PCB. The 682XXB/
Sample and Hold Circuit 683XXB still operates normally but the RF output may be unleveled during pulse
Failed modulation.

Error 143 Indicates a failure of the level slope DAC on the A10 PCB. The 682XXB/683XXB
Slope DAC Failed still operates normally but RF output level flatness may be affected during
frequency sweeps.

Error 144 Indicates that some self-tests were not performed because RF Output was
RF was Off when Selftest selected OFF on the 682XXB/683XXB front panel. Press the OUTPUT key to turn
started. Some tests were RF Output ON and run the instrument self-test again.
not performed.

Error 145 Indicates a failure of the internal AM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide
AM meter or associated amplitude modulation of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the
circuitry failed internal AM generator. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not provide amplitude
modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from an external source.

Error 147 Indicates a failure of the internal FM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide
Internal FM circuitry failed frequency modulation of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the
internal FM generator. The 682XXB/683XXB may or may not provide frequency
modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from an external source.

Error 148 Indicates a failure of the pulse generator 40 MHz oscillator circuitry. The pulse
Pulse 40 MHz reference generator may still function; however, the 40 MHz oscillator is not phase locked to
circuitry failed the 10 MHz reference timebase. The pulse modulation function may or may not
operate.

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-7
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Normal When an abnormal condition is detected during op-

Operation eration, the 682XXB/683XXB displays an error mes-
Error and sage to indicate that the output is abnormal or that
Warning/ a signal input or data entry is invalid. It also dis-
Status plays warning messages to alert the operator to con-
Messages ditions that could cause an inaccurate signal
generator output. Status messages to remind the op-
erator of current menu selections or settings are
also generated. Table 6-2 is a summary list of possi-
ble error messages that can be displayed during nor-
mal operations. Table 6-3 is a summary list of
possible warning/status messages.

Table 6-2. Possible Error Messages during Normal Operations (1 of 2)

Error Message Description

ERROR Displayed (on the frequency mode title bar) when (1) the
output frequency is not phase-locked, (2) an invalid
frequency parameter entry causes a frequency range
error, or (3) an invalid pulse parameter entry causes a
pulse modulation error.

LOCK ERROR Displayed (in the frequency parameters area) when the
output frequency is not phase-locked. The frequency
accuracy and stability of the RF output is greatly
reduced. Normally caused by an internal component
failure. Run self-test to verify malfunction.

RANGE Displayed (in the frequency parameters area) when (1)

the analog sweep start frequency entered is greater than
the stop frequency (683XXB models only), (2) the dF
value entered results in a sweep outside the range of the
instrument, (3) the step size value entered is greater
than the sweep range, or (4) the number of steps
entered results in a step size of less than 1 kHz (0.1 Hz
with Option 11) or 0.1 dB. Entering valid values usually
clears the error.

SLAVE Displayed (in the frequency parameters area of the

Master 68XXXB) during master-slave operation in VNA
mode when the slave frequency offset value entered
results in a CW frequency or frequency sweep outside
the range of the slave 68XXXB. Entering a valid offset
value clears the error.

ERR Displayed (in the modulation status area) when one or

more of the following error conditions occurrs:
(1) The external AM modulating signal exceeds the input
voltage range. In addition, the message “Reduce AM
Input Level” appears at the bottom of the AM status
display. (Continued on next page)

6-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Table 6-2. Possible Error Messages during Normal Operations (2 of 2)

Error Message Description

ERR Continued:
(2) The external FM (or FM) modulating signal exceeds
the input voltage range. In addition, the message
“Reduce FM (or FM) Input Level” appears at the bottom
of the FM (or FM) status display.
(3) A pulse parameter setting is invalid for the current
pulse modulation state, as follows:
Pulse Period: <125 ns (40 MHz clock) or <500 ns
(10 MHz clock) longer than pulse widths + delays
Single Pulse Mode:
Free Run or Gated Trigger:
Width1 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Delay1 + Width1 > PRI
Doublet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) +Width2 >
PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2
Triplet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width 3 > PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width 3 > PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3
Quadruplet Pulse Mode:
Free Run Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4 or
Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 + (Delay3 –
Width2) + Width3 + (Delay4 – Width3) + Width4
> PRI
Delayed Trigger:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4 or
Delay1 + Width1 + (Delay2 – Width1) + Width2 +
(Delay3 – Width2) + Width3 + (Delay4 – Width3) +
Width4 > PRI
External Trigger with or without Delay:
Width1 > Delay2 or Width2 > Delay3 or
Width3 > Delay4

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-9
OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING/
MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES

Table 6-3. Possible Warning/Status Messages during Normal Operation

Warning/Status
Description
Message

OVN COLD This warning message indicates that the 100 MHz
Crystal oven (or the 10 MHz Crystal oven if Option 16 is
installed) has not reached operating temperature.
Normally displayed during a cold start of the sweep
generator. If the message is displayed during normal
operation, it could indicate a malfunction. Run self-test
to verify.

UNLEVELED Displayed when the RF output goes unleveled. Normally

caused by exceeding the specified leveled-power rating.
Reducing the power level usually clears the warning
message.
If the warning message is displayed only when AM is
selected ON, the modulating signal may be driving the
RF output unleveled. Reducing the modulating signal or
adjusting the power level usually clears the warning.

UNLOCKED When Unlocked/Narrow FM or Unlocked/Wide FM is

selected ON, this warning message appears indicating
that the instrument is not phase-locked during this FM
mode of operation.

Reduce Rate This warning message is displayed when the AM rate,

FM rate, or ΦM rate is set >100 kHz for a non-sinewave
modulating waveform. Amplitude, frequency, or phase
modulation of the output signal will continue but the
modulating waveform may be distorted.

EXT REF This status message indicates that an external 10 MHz

signal is being used as the reference signal for the
682XXB/683XXB.

OFFSET This status message indicates that a constant (offset)

has been applied to the displayed power level.

SLOPE This status message indicates that a power slope

correction has been applied to the ALC.

USER 1...5 This status message indicates that a user level flatness
correction power-offset table has been applied to the
ALC.

SS MODE This status message indicates that the 682XXB/

683XXB has been placed in a source lock mode for op-
eration with a 360B Vector Network Analyzer.

6-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR
MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING

6-3 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6-4 provides procedures for troubleshooting common malfunc-
tions encountered during signal generator operation. Included are pro-
cedures for troubleshooting faults that do not produce error messages,
such as, failure to power up and unexpected shutdown.

Table 6-4. Troubleshooting (1 of 3)

Signal Generator will not turn on

(OPERATE light is OFF)

Normal Operation: When the 682XXB/683XXB is connected to the

power source, the OPERATE light should illuminate and the instru-
ment should power up.

Step 1 Disconnect the 682XXB/683XXB from the power source,

then check the line fuse on the rear panel.

q If the fuse is defective, replace (page 6-15).

q If the fuse is good, go to the next step.

Step 2 Check to see if power is available at the power receptacle.

q If not, move to a working receptacle.

q If power is available, go to the next step.

Step 3 Check the power cable.

q If defective, replace.

q If good, call a service technician.

Signal Generator will not turn on

(OPERATE light is ON)

Normal Operation: When the 682XXB/683XXB is connected to the

power source, the OPERATE light should illuminate and the instru-
ment should power up.

q If the OPERATE light illuminates but the unit fails to

power up, the 682XXB/683XXB has an internal compo-
nent failure. Call a service technician.

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-11
OPERATOR
MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. Troubleshooting (2 of 3)

Signal Generator Quits During Operation

(OPERATE light remains on)

Trouble Description: The signal generator operates for some time,

then shuts down (OPERATE light remains on). After a short period, the
signal generator resumes normal operation. This is an indication that
the 682XXB/683XXB has reached an excessive operating temperature.

Step 1 Check that the fan is still operating during the time that the
instrument is shut down.

q If the fan is still operating, clean the air filter (page 6-14).

q If the fan is not operating, call a service technician.

LOCK ERROR is Displayed

Trouble Description: This message is displayed in the frequency pa-

rameters area to indicate that the output frequency is not phase-locked.
It is normally caused by an internal component failure.

Step 1 Perform a self-test of the signal generator by pressing the

System Menu soft-key Selftest .

q If self-test does not result in an error message(s), resume

normal operation.

q If an error message(s) is displayed, call a service techni-

cian.

6-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR
MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 6-4. Troubleshooting (3 of 3)

UNLEVELED is Displayed

Trouble Description: This message is displayed to indicate that the

RF output is unleveled.

Step 1 Check that the output power does not exceed the specified
leveled-power rating and that the RF OUTPUT connector is
terminated into a 50W load.

q Reduce the power level to not exceed the specified

leveled-power rating or terminate the RF OUTPUT con-
nector with a 50W load.

q If error message remains displayed, call a service techni-

cian.

RANGE is Displayed

Trouble Description: This message is displayed in the frequency pa-

rameters area to indicate that (1) the analog sweep start frequency en-
tered is greater than the stop frequency (Model 683XXB only), (2) the
dF value entered results in a sweep outside the range of the instru-
ment, (3) the step size value entered is greater than the sweep range,
or (4) the number of steps entered results in a step size of less than
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11) or 0.1 dB.

Step 1 Check that (1) the analog sweep start frequency entered is
not greater than the stop frequency (Model 683XXB only), (2)
the dF value entered does not try to set the frequency sweep
outside the range of the signal generator, (3) the step size en-
tered is not greater than F2 minus F1, or (4) the number of
steps entered does not result in a step size that is smaller
than the resolution of the instrument.

q Enter a valid sweep start frequency, dF value, step size,

or number of steps.

q If the error message remains displayed, call a service

technician.

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-13
OPERATOR ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

6-4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance that can be performed by the operator consists
of cleaning the fan filter, cleaning the data display, and replacing a de-
fective line fuse.

Cleaning the The signal generator must always receive adequate

Fan Filter ventilation. A blocked fan filter can cause the in-
strument to overheat and shut down. Check and
clean the rear panel fan honeycomb filter periodi-
cally. Clean the filter more frequently in dusty envi-
ronments. Clean the filter as follows:

Step 1 Remove the filter guard from the rear

panel by pulling out on the four panel fas-
teners holding them in place (Figure 6-2).

Step 2 Vacuum the honeycomb filter to clean it.

Step 3 Install the filter guard back on the rear

panel.

Step 4 Press in on the panel fasteners to secure

the filter guard to the rear panel.

Filter
Guard
Panel
Fastener (4)

Figure 6-2. Removing/Replacing the Fan Filter

6-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
OPERATOR ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

Cleaning the The data display of the signal generator is protected

Data Display by a plastic display filter. To clean the display filter,
use mild soap or detergent and water, or a commer-
cial window cleaner. When cleaning use a soft, lint-
free cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaners, tissues, or
paper towels which can scratch the plastic surface.

Replacing the The value of the line fuse used in the 682XXB/
Line Fuse 683XXB is determined by the line voltage selec-
tion—a 5A line fuse for 110 Vac line voltage; a 2.5A
line fuse for 220 Vac line voltage. These line fuse
values are printed on the rear panel next to the fuse
holder.

WARNING
Before changing the fuse, always remove the power cord
from the power outlet. There is the risk of receiving a fatal
electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power cord
connected.

Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by

the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument.

Step 1 Disconnect the signal generator from the

power source.

Step 2 Using a small flat-blade screwdriver, turn

the fuse cap counter-clockwise and re-
move the fuse holder.

Step 3 Replace the fuse in the fuse holder.

Step 4 Install the fuse holder in the rear panel.

Using the screwdriver, rotate the fuse cap
clockwise to secure the fuse holder in
place.

Step 5 Reconnect the signal generator to the

power source.

682XXB/683XXB OM 6-15
OPERATOR ROUTINE
MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE

Fuse

Fuse Holder

Figure 6-1. Replacing the Line Fuse

6-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Chapter 7
Use With Other Instruments

Table of Contents

7-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2 MASTER-SLAVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Connecting the 68XXXBs . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Initiating Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . 7-5
Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Master-Slave Operation in VNA Mode . . . . . . 7-7
Terminating Master-Slave Operation . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3 USE WITH A 562 SNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 562 . . . 7-10
7-4 USE WITH A 360B VNA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 360B . . 7-11
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7-5 USE WITH A 8003 SNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the 8003 . . 7-16
Setting Up the 682XXB/683XXB . . . . . . . . 7-17
Initiating 8003 SNA Operation . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-6 USE WITH A HP8757D SNA
(682XXB Models with Firmware Version 2.42
and above; 682X5B Models with Firmware
Version 1.31 and above; 683XXB Models with
Firmware Version 2.53 and above; 683X5B Models
with Firmware Version 1.35 and above. . . . . . . 7-20
Connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to the
HP8757D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Setting up the 682XXB/683XXB. . . . . . . . . 7-21
Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation . . . . . . . 7-23
 Chapter 7
Use With Other Instruments
7-1 INTRODUCTION This chapter provides information and instructions for using the Se-
ries 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generators with other in-
struments. It contains the following:

q Instructions for interconnecting and operating any two 68XXXBs

in a master-slave configuration.
q Instructions for connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to a ANRITSU
Model 562 Scalar Network Analyzer so that it can be used as a
signal source for the analyzer.
q Instructions for connecting the 682XXB/683XXB to a ANRITSU
Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer and configuring the signal
generator so that it can be used as a signal source for the ana-
lyzer.
q Instructions for connecting the 682XXB/6893XXB to a Giga-
tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer and setting up the
signal generator so that it can be used as a signal source for the
analyzer.
q Instructions for connecting 682XXB models with Firmware Ver-
sion 2.42 and above (682X5B models with Firmware Version 1.31
and above) and 683XXB models with Firmware Version 2.53 and
above (683X5B models with Firmware Version 1.35 and above) to
a Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer and
setting up the signal generator so that it can be used as a signal
source for the analyzer.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-3
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

7-2 MASTER-SLAVE Master-slave operation consists of connecting any two 68XXXBs to-
OPERATION gether and configuring them so that they produce CW and synchro-
nized, swept output signals at an operator-selectable frequency offset.
One 68XXXB (the Master) controls the other (the Slave) via interface
cables between their rear panel AUX I/O and SERIAL I/O connectors.
The two units are phase-locked together by connecting them to the
same 10 MHz reference time base.

TO
562
SNA

SERIAL AUX 10 MHz SERIAL AUX 10 MHz

I/O I/O REF OUT I/O I/O REF IN

RF RF
OUTPUT OUTPUT

68XXXB (Master) 68XXXB (Slave)

TO DUT TO DUT

Figure 7-1. 68XXXB Configuration for Master-Slave Operation

Connecting Connect the two 68XXXBs, shown in Figure 7-1, as

the 68XXXBs follows:

Step 1 Connect the 3-port AUX I/O cable end

NOTES
labeled “MASTER” to the rear panel AUX
When connecting two 68XXXBs to- I/O connector on the Master 68XXXB.
gether for Master-Slave operations, Connect the AUX I/O cable labeled
always use a ANRITSU Master- “SLAVE” to the rear panel AUX I/O
Slave interface cable set, Part No. connector on the Slave 68XXXB.
ND36329.
If a Model 562 Scalar Network Ana- Step 2 Connect the ends of the flat interface
lyzer is being used with the master- cable to the rear panel Serial I/O connec-
slave configuration, (1) connect the tors on the Master and Slave 68XXXBs.
AUX I/O cable end labeled “SNA” to
the rear panel AUX I/O connector on Step 3 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the
the 562 SNA and (2) connect a dedi- rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector on
cated system bus cable (P/N 2100-1) the Master 68XXXB. Connect the other
between the Master 68XXXB rear end to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN con-
panel IEEE-488 GPIB connector and nector on the Slave 683XXB.
the 562 SNA rear panel DEDI-
CATED GPIB connector.

7-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

Step 4 Connect the Master 68XXXB RF OUTPUT

and the Slave 68XXXB RF OUTPUT to the
appropriate connections on the DUT.

Initiating The following paragraphs describe how to set up

Master-Slave both 68XXXBs to perform master-slave operations.
Operation Use the CW Frequency Mode menu map (Chapter 4,
Figure 4-2) to follow the menu sequences.

To initiate master-slave operation, turn on both

68XXXBs and place them in CW mode. The CW
Menu (below) is displayed.

NOTE
Master-slave operations are always On the Master 68XXXB, press Master Slave to go to
initiated in the CW frequency the Master-Slave Menu display (below).
mode. Once initiated, you then can
change to a sweep frequency mode
of operation by selecting the de-
sired frequency mode on the Master
68XXXB.

This menu lets you perform the following:

q Go to the Slave Frequencies List menu.
q Set the dF frequency for the Slave unit.
q Set the Slave unit’s main power level (L1).
q Set the alternate sweep power level (L2) for
the Slave unit.
q Turn master/slave operation on and off.

Press Slave Freqs to go to the Slave Frequencies

List menu (next page).

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-5
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

NOTE
Upon reset, the slave frequencies
(F0 - F9 and M0 - M9) return to the
default values shown here.

This menu lets you edit the listed frequencies for

the Slave 68XXXB.

Use the cursor control key to select a frequency pa-

rameter from the list, then press Edit to edit its
value. Edit the current frequency parameter value
using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or
enter a new value using the key pad and appropri-
ate termination key. Press Edit again to close the
open frequency parameter.

When you are finished editing the slave frequencies,

press Previous Menu to return to the Master-Slave
menu (below).

The Master-Slave menu lets you set the dF fre-

quency and L1 and L2 power level parameters for
the Slave unit.

Press Slave DF to open the dF frequency parame-

ter.

Press Slave L1 to open the main power level pa-

rameter.

Press Slave L2 to open the alternate sweep power

level parameter.

Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit

the current value using the cursor control key or ro-
tary data knob or enter a new value using the key

7-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

pad and appropriate termination key. When you

have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
menu selection.

Press Enable to begin master-slave operation.

Press CW to return to the CW menu.

Master-Slave During master-slave operation, the Slave unit is in

Operation remote mode under the direct control of the Master
68XXXB. The Slave unit displays the following:

q Its output CW frequency or sweep frequency

range.
q Its output power level.
q The messages Remote and Local Lockout.

The CW/sweep frequency settings on the Master

68XXXB define the master sweep, and the corre-
NOTE
sponding frequency settings on the Slave unit define
The 562 SNA, when being used the slave sweep. For example, if slave frequency F1
with the master-slave configura- is set to 4 GHz and slave frequency F2 is set to
tion, will not display markers. 12 GHz, then the Slave unit will sweep from 4 to
12 GHz whenever the F1-F2 sweep range is selected
on the Master 68XXXB. The Master 68XXXB will
sweep from F1-F2 with the values of F1 and F2 de-
fined in the Master unit’s frequency list.

Master-Slave In the VNA mode of master-slave operation, a Slave

Operation in unit is coupled to a Master 68XXXB that is con-
VNA Mode nected to a Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer in
a source or dual source configuration. (Operating in-
structions for the vector network analyzer can be
found in the Model 360B VNA Operation Manual,
P/N 10410-00110.) The following paragraphs de-
scribe how to set up both 68XXXBs to perform
master-slave operations in the VNA mode.

Place both 68XXXBs in CW mode. Then, on the

Master unit, press Master Slave to go to the Master
Slave Menu display (page 7-5).

At the Master Slave menu, press Slave Freqs to go

to the Slave Frequencies List Menu display (next
page).

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-7
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

Press VNA Menu to go to the VNA Menu display

(below).

This menu lets you set the frequency offset and out-
put power level for the Slave 68XXXB in the VNA
mode.

Press VNA Offset to open the slave frequency offset

parameter.

Press VNA Level to open the slave output power

level parameter.
SLAVE
Open the parameter you wish to change, then edit
During master-slave operations in
the current value using the cursor control key or ro-
VNA mode, this error message is
tary data knob or enter a new value using the key
displayed on the Master 68XXXB
pad and appropriate termination key. When you
whenever the slave offset value en-
have finished setting the open parameter, close it by
tered results in a CW frequency or
pressing its menu soft-key or by making another
frequency sweep outside the range
menu selection.
of the Slave unit. Entering a valid
offset value clears the error.
Press Previous Menu to return to the Slave Fre-
quencies List menu.

Return to the Master-Slave menu and press Enable

o begin master-slave operation.

7-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH MASTER-SLAVE
OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION

Terminating The following describes how to terminate master-

Master-Slave slave operation and return the Slave 68XXXB to
Operation local (front panel) control.

On the Master 68XXXB, select CW mode.

At the CW Menu, press Master Slave to go to the

Master-Slave Menu display.

At the Master-Slave Menu display, press Enable .

This terminates master-slave operation and returns
the Slave 68XXXB to local (front panel) control.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-9
USE WITH USE WITH A 562 SCALAR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

7-3 USE WITH A 562 SCALAR The 682XXB/683XXB is directly compatible with the ANRITSU Model
NETWORK ANALYZER 562 Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following paragraphs pro-
vide instructions for connecting the signal generator to the 562 SNA so
that is can be used as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating in-
structions for the network analyzer can be found in the Model 562 Sca-
lar Network Analyzer Operation Manual, P/N 10410-00046.

562 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER

DEDICATED
GPIB

AUX I/O

A B

AUX I/O SWR

AUTOTESTER
IEEE-488GPIB

682XXB/683XXB
DUT

DETECTOR

Figure 7-2. 682XXB/683XXB to 562 SNA Connections

Connecting Connect the 682XXB signal generator or 683XXB

the 682XXB/ signal generator to the 562 SNA as shown in Figure
683XXB to the 7-2.
562

NOTE Step 1 Connect one end of the Auxiliary I/O ca-

The 682XXB/683XXB’s GPIB ad- ble (P/N 806-7) to the 562 rear panel AUX
dress should be set to 5 (the default I/O connector. Connect the other end of
address setting) for operation with the cable to the 682XXB/683XXB rear
a 562 SNA. To verify or change the panel AUX I/O connector.
GPIB address setting refer to Con-
figuring the GPIB on page 3-81. Step 2 Connect one end of the dedicated system
bus cable (P/N 2100-1) to the 562 rear
The 562 SNA will only accept and
panel DEDICATED GPIB connector. Con-
display nine video markers, F1 thru
nect the other end of the cable to the
F9, from the 682XXB/683XXB.
682XXB/683XXB rear panel IEEE-488
When performing amplifier testing GPIB connector.
only use the 682XXB/683XXB
power level, L1. Step 3 Turn on the 682XXB/683XXB and the
562. The system is now ready to operate.

7-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

7-4 USE WITH A 360B The 682XXB/683XXB signal generator is compatible with the AN-
VECTOR NETWORK RITSU Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer (VNA). The following
ANALYZER paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the 682XXB/683XXB
to the 360B VNA and configuring the signal generator so that it can
operate as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for
the vector network analyzer can be found in the Model 360B Vector
Network Analyzer Operation Manual, P/N 10410-00110.

MODEL 360 VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER

SOURCE CONTROL
MODEL 370 NETWORK ANALYZER
SYSTEM BUS

10 MHz REF OUT

EXT FM
O LOCK
OUTPUT
MODEL 3701 ACTIVE DEVICE TEST SET 300 kHz to 8.4 GHz

PORT 1 PORT 2 RF INPUT MODELS 361XA

AND 362XA
GPIB TESTSETS

SEMI-RIGID
COAXIAL CABLE
DUT

FM
IN
MODEL
10 MHz REF IN 682XXB/683XXB
SIGNAL
IEEE-488GPIB GENERATOR
RF
OUTPUT

Figure 7-3. 682XXB/683XXB to 360B VNA Connections

Connecting Connect the 682XXB signal generator or 683XXB

the 682XXB/ signal generator to the 360B vector network ana-
683XXB to the lyzer as shown in Figure 7-3.
360B

Step 1 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the

682XXB/683XXB rear panel FM IN con-
nector. Connect the other end to the 360B
rear panel EXT FM Æ LOCK OUTPUT con-
nector.

Step 2 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the

682XXB/683XXB rear panel 10 MHz REF

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-11
USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

IN connector. Connect the other end to the

NOTE
360B rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT con-
If the 682XXB/683XXB contains an nector.
Option 16 high-stability time base,
connect the coaxial cable in step 2 Step 3 Connect one end of a GPIB cable, 1 meter
between the 682XXB/683XXB rear in length, to the 682XXB/683XXB rear
panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector panel IEEE-488 GPIB connector. Connect
and the 360B rear panel 10 MHz the other end of the cable to the 360B
REF IN connector. rear panel SOURCE CONTROL SYSTEM
BUS connector.

Step 4 Turn on the 682XXB/683XXB and config-

ure it as described in the following para-
graphs.

Modes of There are two 360B VNA receiver modes of opera-

Operation tion that are used with the 682XXB/683XXB—the
360B source lock mode and the 360B tracking mode.
The configuration and operation of the signal gen-
erator for both modes of operation are described in
the following paragraphs.

Source Lock When operating in source lock mode, the 360B

Mode phase locks the frequency output of the signal gen-
erator. This is accomplished by sending a dc control
voltage to the FM input on the 682XXB/683XXB.
Frequency resolution is limited to 100 kHz inter-
vals. This is because of the inherent resolution of
the 360B’s synthesized local oscillators.

Source Lock Mode Configuration

In order for the 682XXB/683XXB to operate with a
360B in source lock mode, the signal generator must
be placed in the SS Mode of operation.

To place the signal generator in SS Mode, first press

the main menu key SYSTEM . At the System Menu
display, press Config . The System Configuration
Menu (shown below) is displayed.

7-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

At the System Configuration menu, press GPIB .

The Configure GPIB Menu (shown below) is dis-
played.

Verify that the GPIB address and terminator shown

on the display match the System Bus source address
and data terminator that are set on the 360B VNA.

If the GPIB address of the 682XXB/683XXB needs

SS MODE changing, press GPIB Address . Enter the new ad-
When SS Mode is selected on, this dress using the cursor control key or the data entry
message is displayed (in the fre- keypad and the terminator key
quency mode title bar) on all menu
displays to remind the operator HZ
ns
that the 682XXB/683XXB is in a ADRS
source lock mode.
The new GPIB address will appear on the display.

NOTES To change the data terminator, press Line Term to

select the correct GPIB data delimiter.
A 360B VNA and a 68237B/68337B,
68253B /68353B, or 68263B/
Press SS Mode to turn on SS mode. This places the
68363B Source in SS Mode should
682XXB/683XXB in a source lock mode.
not be operated below 2.1 GHz be-
cause it may fail to lock.
The signal generator is now configured for 360B
A 360B VNA and a 682X5B/683X5B source lock mode operation.
Source in SS Mode should not be op-
erated below 600 MHz because it Initiating 360B Source Lock Mode Operations
may fail to lock. Turn on the 360B and configure it for source lock
mode of operation. (Refer to the 360B VNA opera-
A 360B VNA that is using a 3612A,
tion manual.) Once configured, the 360B takes con-
3613A, 3622A, 3623A, or 3631A
trol of the signal generator.
Test Set and a 682XXB/683XXB
Source in SS Mode should not be op-
When the 360B takes control, the display of all pa-
erated above 60 GHz because it will
rameters on the 682XXB/683XXB is disabled and
fail to lock. For operations above
the messages SS MODE, Secure Mode Active, and
60 GHz, use the 682XXB/683XXB
Remote appear on the front panel display.
Source in tracking mode.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-13
USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

Terminating 360B Source Lock Mode Opera-

tions
To terminate 360B VNA source lock mode opera-
tions, you must first return the 682XXB/683XXB to
local control and then turn off the SS Mode.

To return the 682XXB/683XXB to local control, turn

off the 360B VNA.

On the 682XXB/683XXB, press SYSTEM , then

Reset . This turns off the Secure mode.

Next, press SYSTEM , then Config to access the

System Configuration Menu display.

At the System Configuration Menu,press GPIB .

When the Configure GPIB Menu (shown below) is
displayed, press SS Mode to turn the SS mode off.

Tracking When operating in tracking mode, the 360B steers

Mode its second local oscillator frequency and phase sig-
nal so as to phase-lock itself to the reference signal
from the 682XXB/683XXB. Frequency resolution is
limited to 1 kHz intervals. This is because of the in-
herent resolution of the 360B’s frequency readout.

Tracking Mode Configuration

In order for the 682XXB/683XXB to operate with a
360B in tracking mode, the signal generator must
be operating in normal mode (SS Mode off). In addi-
tion, its GPIB address and data terminator must
match the System Bus source address and data ter-
minator that are set on the 360B VNA.

To verify the GPIB address and data terminator or

to turn the SS mode off, press SYSTEM . At the
System Menu display, press Config . When the Sys-
tem Configuration Menu is displayed, press GPIB .
The Configure GPIB Menu (below) is displayed.

7-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

If the GPIB address of the 682XXB/683XXB needs

changing, press GPIB Address . Enter the new ad-
dress using the cursor control key or the data entry
keypad and the terminator key

HZ
ns
ADRS

The new GPIB address will appear on the display.

To change the data terminator, press Line Term to

select the correct GPIB data delimiter.

To turn SS mode off, press SS Mode .

The signal generator is now configured for 360B

tracking mode operation.

Initiating 360B Tracking Mode Operations

Turn on the 360B and configure it for tracking mode
of operation. (Refer to the 360B VNA operation man-
ual.) Once configured, the 360B should take control
of the signal generator.

When the 360B takes control, the display of all pa-

rameters on the 682XXB/683XXB is disabled and
the messages Secure Mode Active and Remote ap-
pear on the front panel display.

Terminating 360B Tracking Mode Operations

To terminate 360B VNA tracking mode operations,
you must first return the 682XXB/683XXB to local
control and then turn off the Secure mode.

To return the 682XXB/683XXB to local control, turn

off the 360B VNA.

On the 682XXB/683XXB, press SYSTEM , then

Reset . This turns off the Secure mode and returns
the signal generator to local control.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-15
USE WITH USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

7-5 USE WITH A 8003 The 682XXB/683XXB signal generator is compatible with the Giga-
SCALAR NETWORK tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following
ANALYZER paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the 682XXB/683XXB
to the 8003 SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can op-
erate as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for
the scalar network analyzer can be found in the Giga-tronics Model
8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual.

HORIZ OUT SWEEP IN

PULSE TRIGGER IN AC MOD OUT

SEQ SYNC OUT BLANKING INPUT

GPIB/PRIVATE

GPIB

A B C
8003 SCALAR
682XXB/683XXB NETWORK ANALYZER
To DUT

To DUT
SENSOR

Figure 7-4. 682XXB/683XXB to 8003 SNA Connections

Connecting Connect the 682XXB signal generator or 683XXB

the 682XXB/ signal generator to the 8003 scalar network ana-
683XXB to the lyzer as shown in Figure 7-4.
8003

Step 1. Connect one end of a GPIB cable to the

682XXB/683XXB rear panel IEEE-488
GPIB connector. Connect the other end of
the cable to the 8003 rear panel GPIB/
PRIVATE connector.

Step 2. Connect one end of a coaxial cable having

BNC connectors to the 682XXB/683XXB
rear panel HORIZ OUT connector. Con-
nect the other end of the cable to the 8003
rear panel SWEEP IN connector.

Step 3. Connect one end of a coaxial cable having

BNC connectors to the 682XXB/683XXB

7-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.

Connect the other end of the cable to the
8003 rear panel AC MOD OUT connector.

Step 4. Connect one end of a coaxial cable having

BNC connectors to the 682XXB/683XXB
rear panel SEQ SYNC OUT connector.
Connect the other end of the cable to the
8003 rear panel BLANKING INPUT con-
nector.

Setting Up The 682XXB/683XXB must be in the 8003 Scalar

the 682XXB/ GPIB mode of operation in order to operate as a sig-
683XXB nal source for the SNA. The following paragraphs
describe how to set up the 682XXB/683XXB to en-
able the 8003 Scalar GPIB mode.

On the 682XXB/683XXB front panel, press LINE to

place the signal generator in operation.

Allow the signal generator to warm up, then press

the SYSTEM main menu key. At the System Menu
display, press Config . The System Configuration
Menu (shown below) is displayed.

At the System Configuration menu, press GPIB .

The Configure GPIB Menu (shown below) is dis-
played.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-17
USE WITH USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

At the Configure GPIB menu, press More to go to

the Fist Additional Configure GPIB Menu (below).

At this menu, press More to go to the Second Addi-

tional Configure GPIB Menu (below).

Press 8003 Scalar to enable the 8003 Scalar GPIB

mode. The display will reflect your selection.

The 682XXB/683XXB signal generator is now ready

to operate as a signal source for the 8003 SNA.

Initiating To initiate SNA operation, turn ON the Model 8003

8003 SNA and calibrate a 8003 sensor(s). (Refer to the Model
Operation 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual
for the calibration procedure.)

Use the following procedure to set the 8003 Source

Address to “5”. (The default address is “6”.)

Step 1 On the 8003 front panel, press the CON-

FIG key.

Step 2 Select GPIB DEVICES from the menu dis-

played on the CRT screen.

Step 3 Select SOURCE, then SOURCE AD-

DRESS.

Step 4 Enter 5 on the keypad, then press the

dB/GHz termination key.

7-18 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR
OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER

The 8003 will search for a source at address “5”.

(The default GPIB address of the series 682XXB/
683XXB signal generators is “5”.) When the 8003
has properly identified the 682XXB/683XXB, the
message “Initializing W6700” will be displayed on
the 8003 CRT screen. (The 682XXB/683XXB emu-
lates the ANRITSU 6700B Swept Frequency Syn-
thesizer GPIB command codes.)

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-19
USE WITH USE WITH A HP8757D
OTHER INSTRUMENTS SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER

7-6 USE WITH A HP8757D Models 682XXB with Firmware Version 2.42 and above
SCALAR NETWORK (Models 682X5B with Firmware Version 1.31 and above)
ANALYZER Models 683XXB wirh Firmware Version 2.53 and above
(Models 683X5B with Firmware Version 1.35 and above)
The 682XXB/683XXB signal generator is compatible with the Hewlett
Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer (SNA). The following
paragraphs provide instructions for connecting the 682XXB/683XXB
to the HP8757D SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can
operate as a signal source for the analyzer. Operating instructions for
the scalar network analyzer can be found in the Hewlett Packard
Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual.

S W P D W E L L IN S T O P S W E E P
S E Q S Y N C P O S Z B L A N K

H O R IZ O U T S W E E P IN 0 - 1 0 V

P U L S E T R IG G E R IN M O D U L A T O R D R IV E

8 7 5 7 S Y S T E M
A U X IN T E R F A C E
IE E E -4 8 8
I/O G P IB

A B C R

6 8 2 X X B /6 8 3 X X B H P 8 7 5 7 D S C A L A R
S IG N A L G E N E R A T O R T o D U T N E T W O R K A N A L Y Z E R

T o D U T
S E N S O R

Figure 7-5. 682XXB/683XXB to HP8757D SNA Connections

Connecting Connect the 682XXB/683XXB signal generator to

the 682XXB/ the HP8757D scalar network analyzer as shown in
683XXB to the Figure 7-5.
HP8757D

Step 1 Connect one end of a GPIB cable to the

682XXB/683XXB rear panel IEEE-488
GPIB connector. Connect the other end to
the HP8757D rear panel 8757 SYSTEM
INTERFACE connector.

7-20 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A HP8757D
OTHER INSTRUMENTS SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER

Step 2 Connect one end of a coaxial cable having

BNC connectors to the 682XXB/683XXB
rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector.
Connect the other end of the cable to the
HP8757D rear panel MODULATOR DRIVE
connector.

Step 3 Connect the special AUX I/O interface

cable (Anritsu Part No. 806-90) to the
682XXB/683XXB rear panel AUX I/O
connector. Connect the cable end having
BNC connectors as follows:

a. Connect the cable end labeled “SEQ

SYNC” to the HP8757D rear panel
POS Z BLANK connector.
b. Connect the cable end labeled “SWP
DWELL IN” to the HP8757D rear
panel STOP SWEEP connector.
c. Connect the cable end labeled “HORIZ
OUT” to the HP8757D rear panel
SWEEP IN 0 - 10V connector.

Setting up the The 682XXB/683XXB must be set to GPIB address

682XXB/ 19 and in the 8757D Scalar mode of operation to
683XXB function as a signal source for the SNA. The follow-
ing paragraphs describe how to set up the 682XXB/
683XXB to enable 8757D Scalar GPIB mode.

On the 682XXB/683XXB front panel, press LINE to

place the signal generator in operation.

Allow the signal generator to warm up, then press

the SYSTEM main menu key. At the System Menu
display, press Config . The System Configuration
Menu (below) is displayed.

At the System Configuration menu, press GPIB .

The Configure GPIB Menu (on the following page) is
displayed.

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-21
USE WITH USE WITH A HP8757D
OTHER INSTRUMENTS SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER

Press GPIB Address to change the address of the

682XXB/683XXB on the bus. Enter 19 using the cur-
sor control key or the data entry keypad and the ter-
minator key.

Hz
ms
ADRS

The new GPIB address (19) will appear on the dis-

play.

Press More to go to the First Additional Configure

GPIB menu (below).

At this menu, press More to go to the Second Addi-

tional Configure GPIB menu (below).

Press 8757D Scalar to enable the 8757D Scalar

GPIB mode. When enabled, the 683XXB will shift to
the analog sweep frequency mode (the 682XXB will
shift to step sweep frequency mode) sweeping at the
full range of the instrument.

7-22 682XXB/683XXB OM
USE WITH USE WITH A HP8757D
OTHER INSTRUMENTS SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER

Initiating Turn ON the HP8757D to initiate scalar network

HP8757D analyzer operation. (Refer to the Hewlett Packard
SNA Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Operation
Operation Manual for operating instructions.)

682XXB/683XXB OM 7-23/7-24
 Appendix A
Rear Panel Connectors
A-1 INTRODUCTION This appendix provides descriptions for the rear panel connectors on a
typical Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator.

A-2 REAR PANEL Figure A-1 provides a illustration of the rear panel and describes the
CONNECTORS rear panel connectors.

A-3 CONNECTOR PINOUT Figures A-2 and A-3 provide pinout diagrams and descriptions for the
DIAGRAMS AUX I/O and IEEE-488 GPIB multipin connectors on the rear panel.

682XXB/683XXB OM A-1
REAR PANEL
CONNECTORS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

10 MHz 10 MHz NOTE: USE SLOW BLO FUSES ONLY

REF IN REF OUT FM/0M
IN
110
! CAUTION 220V

220
2.5A
110V LINE

AUX I/O
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIGGER > 18 kg 5A SELECT

IN AM IN
HEAVY WEIGHT !
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE
WITH POWER CORD
UNGROUNDED
13
SEQ PULSE EXT
SYNC VIDEO ALC
OUT OUT IN INPUT
90 - 132VAC
180 - 264VAC
48 - 440Hz

PULSE DWELL
FM OUT SYNC IN
OUT IEEE-488 GPIB

V/GHz SERIAL
AM OUT I/O
OUT

20 19 18 17 16 15 14

NOTE: USE SLOW BLO

FUSES ONLY

110
220

220V LINE
2.5A SELECT
110V
5A

CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE
WITH POWER CORD
UNGROUNDED

INPUT
90 - 132VAC
180 - 264VAC
48 - 440Hz

1 AUX I/O: 25-pin connector that provides for 3 HORIZ OUT: Provides a 0V to 10V ramp dur-
single cable interface with another signal gen- ing all sweep modes, regardless of sweep
erator (master-slave operation) and with other width. In the CW mode, provides a voltage be-
ANRITSU instruments such as the ANRITSU tween 0V and 10V proportional to the full fre-
562 Scalar Network Analyzer. A connector pin- quency range of the instrument. When the CW
out diagram is shown in Figure A-2. Ramp is enabled, connector provides a repeti-
tive 0V to 10V ramp. BNC connector, 50W im-
2 SEQ SYNC OUT: Provides a +5V signal during
pedance.
sweep retrace, at bandswitching points, and
during each frequency step in step sweep 4 10 MHz REF IN: Accepts an external 10 MHz
mode. Also, when video markers are selected, ±100 Hz, 0 to 10 dBm time-base signal. Auto-
provides –5V marker pulses and a –10V se- matically disconnects the internal high-
lected marker pulse during forward sweep. stability, time-base option, if installed. BNC
BNC connector. connector, 50W impedance.

Figure A-1. Rear Panel, Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator (1 of 2)

A-2 682XXB/683XXB OM
REAR PANEL
CONNECTORS

5 10 MHz REF OUT: Provides a 0.5 Vp-p, AC 14 IEEE-488 GPIB: 24-pin connector that pro-
coupled, 10 MHz signal derived from the inter- vides for remotely controlling the signal gen-
nal frequency standard of the signal generator. erator from an external controller via the
BNC connector, 50W impedance. IEEE-488 bus (GPIB). A connector pinout dia-
gram is shown in Figure A-3.
6 PULSE TRIGGER IN: Accepts an external
TTL compatible signal to pulse modulate the 15 SERIAL I/O: Provides access to two RS-232
RF output signal or to trigger or gate the inter- terminal ports to support service and calibra-
nal pulse generator. BNC connector. tion functions and master-slave operations.
RJ45 connector.
7 PULSE VIDEO OUT: Provides video modulat-
ing signal from the internal pulse generator or 16 DWELL IN: Accepts an external TTL low-level
external pulse input. BNC connector. signal to pause the sweep in both analog and
step sweep modes. The sweep resumes when
8 FM/FM IN: Accepts an external modulating
the signal is removed. BNC connector.
signal to produce FM/(FM with Option 06) on
the RF output. FM/FM sensitivity, FM/FM 17 V/GHz OUT: Provides a reference voltage
mode, and input impedance (50W or 600W) are relative to the frequency of the RF output (see
selectable via front panel menu or GPIB. BNC table below). BNC connector.
connector.
Model Number V/GHz Output
9 AM IN: Accepts an external modulating signal
to produce AM on the RF output. AM sensitiv- 68X37B, 68X45B, 68X47B 1.0V/GHz
ity (Linear or Log) and input impedance (50W 68X53B, 68X55B, 68X59B 0.5V/GHz
or 600W) are selectable via front panel menu 68X63B, 68X65B, 68X69B 0.5V/GHz
or GPIB. BNC connector.
68X75B, 68X77B 0.25V/GHz
10 EXT ALC IN: Provides for leveling the RF out- 68X85B, 68X87B 0.25V/GHz
put signal externally with either a remote de-
68X95B, 68X97B 0.25V/GHz
tector or a power meter. Connector accepts a
positive or negative 0.5—500 mV signal from a
remote detector or a ±1V signal from a remote
power meter. BNC connector.
18 PULSE SYNC OUT: Provides a TTL compati-
ble signal synchronized to the internal pulse
11 Line Fuse: Provides over-voltage/current pro- modulation output. BNC connector.
tection for signal generator circuits during op-
19 AM OUT: Provides video modulating signal
eration and standby. Unit requires a 5A, slow
from the internal AM generator. BNC connec-
blow fuse for 110 Vac line voltage or a 2.5A,
tor.
slow blow fuse for 220 Vac line voltage.
12 20 FM OUT: Provides video modulating signal
LINE SELECT Switch: Provides selection of
from the internal FM generator. BNC connec-
110 or 220 Vac line voltages. When 110 Vac is
tor.
selected, the 682XXB/683XXB accepts 90-
132 Vac, 48-440 Hz line voltage; when
220 Vac is selected, the 682XXB/683XXB ac-
cepts 180-264 Vac, 48-440 Hz line voltage.
13 Input Line Voltage Receptacle: Provides for
connecting line voltage to the 682XXB/
683XXB signal generator.

Figure A-1. Rear Panel, Series 682XXB/683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator (2 of 2)

682XXB/683XXB OM A-3
REAR PANEL CONNECTOR
CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS

AUX I/O

13
25
12
24
11
23
10
22
9
21
8
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
16
3
15
2
14
1

PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

Horizontal Sweep Output: Provides a 0V at beginning and +10V at end of sweep

for all sweep modes, regardless of sweep width. In the CW mode, the voltage is
1 HORIZ OUTPUT proportional to frequency between 0V at low end and +10V at the high end of
range. In CW mode, if CW Ramp is enabled, a repetitive, 0V to +10V ramp is pro-
vided. The ramp speed is adjusted by the Sweep Time function.
2 GND Chassis Ground
Sequential Sync Output: Provides a +5V signal during sweep retrace, at band-
3 SEQ SYNC switching points, and during each frequency step in step sweep mode, –5V during
markers, and –10V during the selected marker.
4 L ALT ENABLE L-Alternate Enable Output: Provides a TTL low-level signal which indicates that
the alternate sweep mode is active.
5 MARKER OUTPUT Marker Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal during a marker. Signal polarity se-
lected from a front panel menu.
6 RETRACE BLANKING Retrace Blanking Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal coincident with sweep re-
trace. Signal polarity selected from a front panel menu.
L-Alternate Sweep Output: Provides a TTL low-level signal to indicate that the pri-
7 L ALT SWP mary sweep is in progress or a TTL high-level signal to indicate that the alternate
sweep is in progress.
8 Shield Cable Shield/Chassis Ground

9 TRIGGER OUTPUT Trigger Output: Provides a TTL low-level trigger signal for external devices or in-
struments.
Sweep Dwell Output: Provides an open-collector output which goes to ground
10 SWP DWELL OUT when the sweep is dwelled at the start, stop, and bandswitching frequencies, and
at the markers.
11 LOCK STATUS Lock Status Output: Provides a TTL high-level signal when the frequency is
phase-locked.
12 RXb RXb: Serial Data Input to the processor (/t1).
13 EXT TRIGGER External Trigger: Accepts a TTL low-level signal of 1 ms width to trigger a sweep.

Figure A-2. Pinout Diagram, AUX I/O Connector (1 of 2)

A-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
REAR PANEL CONNECTOR
CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS

PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

V/GHz Output: Provides a reference voltage relative to the RF output frequency

14 V/GHz (1.0 V/GHz for Models 68X37B, 68X45B, and 68X47B; 0.5 V/GHz for Models
68X53B, 68X55B, 68X59B, 68X63B, 68X65B, and 68X69B; 0.25V/GHz for Mod-
els 68X75B, 68X77B, 68X85B, 68X87B, 68X95B, and 68X97B).
15 EOS INPUT End-of-Sweep Input: Accepts a TTL high-level signal to tell the signal generator
to begin the end of sweep dwell.
16 EOS OUTPUT End-of-Sweep Output: Provides a TTL high-level signal when the signal genera-
tor has begun the end of sweep dwell.
17 AUX 1 Aux 1: Auxiliary input/output to the processor (PB6).

18 SWP DWELL IN Sweep Dwell Input: Permits a TTL low-level signal to stop the sweep in both ana-
log- and step-sweep modes. The sweep resumes when the signal is removed.
19 AUX 2 Aux 2: Auxiliary input/output to the processor (PC3).

20 BANDSWITCH BLANK Bandswitch Blanking Output: Provides a +5V or –5V signal coincident with band-
switching points. Signal polarity is selected from a front panel menu.
21 SPARE
Horizontal Sweep Input: Accepts a 0V to 10V external sweep ramp from a Master
22 HORIZ IN signal generator. This input is automatically selected when the signal generator is
in the Slave Mode.
23 Return Horizontal Sweep Input return.
24 TXb TXb: Serial Data Output from the processor.

25 MEMORY SEQ Memory Sequencing Input: Accepts a TTL low-level signal to sequence through
nine stored, front panel setups.

Figure A-2. Pinout Diagram, AUX I/O Connector (2 of 2)

682XXB/683XXB OM A-5
REAR PANEL CONNECTOR
CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS

IEEE-488 GPIB

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1-4 DIO 1 thru DIO 4 Data Input/Output: Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the
data is logical 1.
5 EOI End or Identify: A low-true state indicates that the last byte of a multibyte mes-
sage has been placed on the line.
Data Valid: A low-true state indicates that the active talker has (1) sensed that
6 DAV NRFD is high-false and NDAC is low-true, (2) placed the data byte on the bus,
and (3) waited an appropriate length of time for the data to settle.
7 NRFD Not Ready For Data: A high-false state indicates that all active listeners are ready
to accept new data.
8 NDAC Not Data Accepted: A low-true state indicates that all addressed listeners have
accepted the current data byte for internal processing.
9 IFC Interface Clear: A low-true state places all bus instruments in a known, quiescent
state—unaddressed to talk, unaddressed to listen, and service request idle.
10 SRQ Service Request: A low-true state indicates that a bus instrument desires the im-
mediate attention of the controller.
Attention: A low-true state indicates that the bus is in the command mode (data
11 ATN lines are carrying bus commands). A high-false state indicates that the bus is in
the data mode (data lines are carrying device-dependent instructions or data).
12 Shield Chassis Ground

13-16 DIO5 thru DIO6 Data Input/Output: Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the
data is logical 1.
17 REN Remote Enable: A low-true state enables bus instruments to be operated re-
motely, when addressed.
18-24 GND Logic Ground

Figure A-3. Pinout Diagram, IEEE-488 GPIB Connector

A-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Appendix B
Performance Specifications
B-1 INTRODUCTION This appendix contains the following performance specifications:

q Series 682XXB Synthesized Signal Generator performance speci-

fications beginning on page B-3.
q Series 683XXB Synthesized Signal Generator performance speci-
fications beginning on page B-13.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-1/B-2
 Series 682XXB
Synthesized Signal Generator
Performance Specifications
MODEL SUMMARY 10 MHz Reference Output: 0.5 Vp-p into 50W,AC cou-
pled. Rear panel BNC; 50W impedance.
Model Frequency Range Switching Time (typical maximum): <40 ms to be within
1 kHz of final frequency.
68237B 2.0 to 20.0 GHz
PHASE-LOCKED STEP SWEEP MODE
68245B 0.5 to 20.0 GHz
Sweep Width: Independently selected, 1 kHz (0.1 Hz with
68247B 0.01 to 20.0 GHz Option 11) to full range. Every frequency step in sweep
68253B 2.0 to 26.5 GHz range is phase-locked.
Accuracy: Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base.
68255B 0.5 to 26.5 GHz Resolution (Minimum Step Size):
68259B 0.01 to 26.5 GHz 1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11)
Steps: User-selectable number of steps or step size.
68263B 2.0 to 40.0 GHz
Number of Steps: Variable from 1 to 10,000
68265B 0.5 to 40.0 GHz Step Size: 1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11) to the full fre-
68269B 0.01 to 40.0 GHz quency range of the instrument. (If the step size does not
divide into the selected frequency range, the last step is
68275B 0.5 to 50.0 GHz
truncated.)
68277B 0.01 to 50.0 GHz Dwell Time Per Step: Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds
68285B 0.5 to 60.0 GHz Switching Time (typical maximum): <15 ms +
1 ms/GHz step size or <40 ms, whichever is less.
68287B 0.01 to 60.0 GHz
0.5 to 65.0 GHz ALTERNATE SWEEP MODE
68295B
(with usable output to 67 GHz) Sweeps alternately in step sweep between any two sweep
0.01 to 65.0 GHz ranges. Each sweep range may be associated with a dif-
68297B ferent power level.
(with usable output to 67 GHz)
MANUAL SWEEP MODE
FREQUENCY Provides stepped, phase-locked adjustment of frequency
between sweep limits. User-selectable number of steps or
CW MODE
step size.
Output: Twenty independent, presettable CW frequencies
(F0 – F9 and M0 – M9).
Accuracy: Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base. 360B VNA SOURCE LOCK MODE
Internal Time Base Stability: Under control of the ANRITSU 360B Vector Network Ana-
With Aging: <2 x 10-8/day lyzer, the synthesized signal generator is phase-locked at a
(<5 x 10–10/day with Option 16) typical <8.5 ms/step sweep speed. Frequency resolution is
With Temperature: <2 x 10-8/°C over 0°C to 55°C limited to 100 kHz.
(<2 x 10-10/°C with Option 16) Minimum specified frequency is 0.6 GHz for 682X5B units
Resolution: and 2.1 GHz for models 68237B, 68253B,and 68263B.
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11)
External 10 MHz Reference Input: Accepts external PROGRAMMABLE FREQUENCY AGILITY
10 MHz ±100 Hz, 0 to +10 dBm time base signal. Automati- Under GPIB control, up to 1000 non-sequential frequencies
cally disconnects the internal high-stability time-base option, can be stored and then addressed as a phase-locked step
if installed. BNC, rear panel, 50W impedance. sweep. Data stored in volatile memory.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-3
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

MARKERS SINGLE-SIDEBAND PHASE NOISE

Up to 20 independent, settable markers (F0 – F9 and (dBc/Hz)
M0 – M9).
Video Markers: +5V or –5V marker output, selectable Offset From Carrier
Frequency
from system menus. AUX I/O connector, rear panel.
Marker Accuracy: Same as sweep frequency accuracy. (GHz)
100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz
Marker Resolution:
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11) 0.6
–87 –100 –98 –115
(682X5B)
SWEEP TRIGGERING 0.6 –77 –88 –86 –100
Sweep triggering is provided for Step Frequency Sweep
2.0
and CW Power Sweep. –81 –94 –92 –109
(682X5B)
Auto: Triggers sweep automatically.
External: Triggers a sweep on the low to high transition of 2.0 –80 –88 –86 –102
an external TTL signal. AUX I/O connector, rear panel. 6.0 –78 –88 –86 –102
Single: Triggers, aborts, and resets a single sweep. Reset
sweep may be selected to be at the top or bottom of the 10.0 –73 –86 –83 –102
sweep. The pen lift will activate at sweep speeds ³1 sec- 20.0 –66 –78 –78 –100
ond.
26.5 –63 –78 –76 –96
SPECTRAL PURITY 40.0 –60 –75 –72 –94
All specifications apply to the phase-locked CW and Step 50.0 –54 –69 –66 –88
Sweep modes at the lesser of +10 dBm output or maxi- 65.0 –54 –69 –64 –88
mum specified leveled output power, unless otherwise
noted.
POWER LINE and FAN ROTATION SPURIOUS
SPURIOUS SIGNALS EMISSIONS (dBc)
Harmonic and Harmonic Related:
500 MHz to £2.2 GHz (682X5B): <–50 dBc Frequency Offset From Carrier
10 MHz to £50 MHz: <–30 dBc Range
>50 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc (GHz) <300 Hz 300Hz to 1 kHz >1 kHz
>2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 682X5B) to £20 GHz: <–60 dBc
0.5 to £1.0
>20 GHz to £40 GHz: <–40 dBc <–62 <–72 <–72
(682X5B)
Harmonic and Harmonic Related (Models having an
high-end frequency of >40 GHz and units with Option >1.0 to £2.2
<–56 <–66 <–66
15B at maximum specified leveled output power): (682X5B)
500 MHz to £2.2 GHz (682X5B): <–50 dBc 0.01 (>2.2 for
10 MHz to £50 MHz: <–50 <–60 <–60
<–30 dBc 682X5B) to £8.4
>50 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc
>8.4 to £20 <–46 <–56 <–60
>2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 682X5B) to £20 GHz: <–50 dBc
>20 GHz to £40 GHz: <–40 dBc >20 to £40 <–40 <–50 <–54
50 GHZ units; >40 GHz to £50 GHz: <–40 dBc >40 to £65 <–34 <–44 <–48
60 GHz units; >40 GHz to £60 GHz: <–30 dBc
65 GHz units; >40 GHz to £45 GHz: <–25 dBc
>45 GHz to £65 GHz: <–30 dBc
Nonharmonics:
500 MHz to £2.2 GHz (682X5B): <–50 dBc
10 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc
>2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 682X5B) to £65 GHz: <–60 dBc

B-4 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

RESIDUAL FM RF OUTPUT
(50 Hz - 15 kHz BW)
Power level specifications apply at 25° ±10° C.
Frequency Range Residual FM MAXIMUM LEVELED OUTPUT POWER
(GHz) (Hz RMS)
Output Power
Frequency Output
0.5 to £1.0 Model with Step
<30 Range Power
(682X5B) Number Attenuator
(GHz) (dBm)
(dBm)
>1.0 to £2.2
<60
(682X5B) 68237B 2.0 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
0.01 (>2.2 for 682X5B) 68245B 0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
<120
to £8.4 68247B 0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
>8.4 to £20 <220 2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
68253B
>20 to £40 <440 >20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0
>40 to £65 <880
68255B >2.2 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
0.01 to £2.0 +13.0 +11.0
RESIDUAL FM 68259B >2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
(Unlocked FM modes, 50 Hz - 15 kHz BW)
2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
68263B
>20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
Frequency Unlocked Narrow Unlocked Wide
Range FM Mode FM Mode 0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0
(GHz) (kHz RMS) (kHz RMS) 68265B >2.2 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
0.5 to £1.0 0.01 to £2.0 +13.0 +11.0
<1.25 <6.3
(682X5B) 68269B >2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
>1.0 to £2.2
<2.5 <12.5
(682X5B) 0.5 to £2.2 +11.0
+10.0
0.01 (>2.2 for >2.2 to £20.0 +10.0
<5 <25 68275B +8.5
>20.0 to £40.0 +2.5
682X5B) to £20 0.0
>40.0 to £50.0 +2.5
–1.0
>20 to £40 <10 <50
0.01 to £2.0 +12.0 +10.0
>40 to £65 <20 <100 >2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
68277B
>20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
>40.0 to £50.0 +2.5 –1.0
0.5 to £2.2 +11.0 +10.0
AM Noise Floor: >2.2 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
Typically –145 dBm/Hz at 0 dBm output and offsets 68285B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
>5 MHz from carrier. >40.0 to £50.0 +2.0 –1.5
>50.0 to £60.0 +2.0 –2.0
0.5 to £2.0 +12.0 +10.0
>2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
68287B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
>40.0 to £50.0 +2.0 –1.5
>50.0 to £60.0 +2.0 –2.0
0.5 to £2.2 +11.0
>2.2 to £20.0 +10.0
Not
68295B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5
Available
>40.0 to £50.0 0.0
>50.0 to £65.0 –2.0

682XXB/683XXB OM B-5
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

MAXIMUM LEVELED OUTPUT POWER (Continued) POWER LEVEL SWITCHING TIME (to within specified
accuracy):
Output Power Without Change in Step Attenuator: <1 ms typical
Frequency Output
Model with Step With Change in Step Attenuator: <20 ms typical
Range Power
Number Attenuator
(GHz) (dBm)
(dBm) ACCURACY AND FLATNESS
0.5 to £2.0 +12.0 Attenua- Frequency
>2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 tion (GHz)
Not
68297B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 Below 0.01-0.
Available 0.05-20 20-40 40-50 50-60 60-65
>40.0 to £50.0 0.0 Max Power 05
>50.0 to £65.0 –2.0
Accuracy:
With Option 15B (High Power) Installed 0-25 dB Á ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.5 dB ±1.5 dB ±1.5 dB

68237B 2.0 to 20.0 +17.0 +15.0 25-60 dB ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.5 dB ±3.5 dBÀ N/A

0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0 >60 dB ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±2.5 dBÀ ±3.5 dBÀ N/A
68245B
>2.2 to £20.0 +17.0 +15.0 Flatness:
0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0 0-25 dB Á ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±1.1 dB ±1.1 dB ±1.1 dB
68247B
>2.2 to £20.0
25-60 dB ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±1.1 dB ±3.1 dBÀ
+17.0 +15.0
N/A
2.0 to £20.0
>60 dB ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±2.1 dBÀ ±3.1 dBÀ
+13.0 +11.0
68253B N/A
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5
0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
68255B
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5 OTHER OUTPUT POWER SPECIFICATIONS
0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0 Output Power Resolution: 0.01 dB
68259B
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5 Source Impedance: 50W nomimal
2 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0 Source SWR (Internal Leveling):
68263B
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0 Without Attenuator: <1.7 at <2 GHz typical
0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0 <1.6 at 2 to 20 GHz typical
68265B <2.0 at >20 GHz typical
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
With Attenuator: <2.0 typical
0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
68269B Power Level Stability with Temperature:
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
0.04 dB/°C typical
68275B 0.5 to 50.0 Standard Standard
Level Offset: Offsets the displayed power level to estab-
68277B 0.01 to 50.0 Standard Standard lish a new reference level.
68285B 0.5 to 60.0 Standard Standard OUTPUT ON/OFF: Toggles the RF output between an Off
and On state. During the Off state, the RF oscillator is
68287B 0.01 to 60.0 Standard Standard
turned off. The On or Off state is indicated by two LEDs lo-
68295B 0.5 to 65.0 Standard Not Available cated below the OUTPUT ON/OFF key on the front panel.
68297B 0.01 to 65.0 Standard Not Available RF On/Off Between Frequency Steps: System menu se-
lection of RF On or RF Off during frequency switching in
CW or Step Sweep modes.
RF On/Off During Retrace: System menu selection of RF
LEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE On or RF Off during retrace.
Without an Attenuator: Maximum leveled power to Internal Leveling: Power is leveled at the output connec-
tor in all modes.
–15 dBm (–20 dBm typical). For units with Option 15B in-
stalled, minimum settable power is –5 dBm (–10 dBm typi-
cal).
With an Attenuator: Maximum leveled power to
–115 dBm (–120 dBm typical). For 68275B, 68277B,
68285B, 68287B, and units with Option 15B installed,
minimum settable power is –105 dBm (–110 dBm typical)

UNLEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE (typical)

Without an Attenuator: >40 dB below max power.
With an Attenuator: >130 dB below max power. À Typical
Á 0 to 25 dB or to minimum rated power, whichever is higher

B-6 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

External Leveling: MODULATION

External Detector: Levels output power at a remote
detector location. Accepts a positive or negative 0.5 mV to AMPLITUDE MODULATION
500 mV input signal from the remote detector. EXT ALC All amplitude modulation specifications apply at 50%
ADJ adjusts the input signal range to an optimum value. depth, 1 kHz rate, with RF level set 6 dB below maximum
BNC connector, front and rear panel. specified leveled output power, unless otherwise noted.
External Power Meter: Levels output power at a re- External AM Input: Log AM or Linear AM input, front or
rear-panel BNC, 50W or 600W input impedance. All options
mote power meter location. Accepts a ±1V full scale input
selectable from modulation menu.
signal from the remote power meter. EXT ALC ADJ ad- AM Sensitivity:
justs the input signal range to an optimum value. BNC Log AM: Continuously variable from 0 dB/volt to
connector, front and rear panel. 25 dB/volt
External Leveling Bandwidth: Linear AM: Continuously variable from 0% per volt to
30 kHz typical in Detector mode. 100% per volt
0.7 Hz typical in Power Meter mode. AM Depth (typical): 0-90% linear; 20 dB log
User Level Flatness Correction: AM Bandwidth (3 dB):
Number of points: 2 to 801 points per table DC to 50 kHz minimum
Number of tables: 5 available DC to 100 kHz typical
Entry modes: GPIB power meter or computed data Flatness (DC to 10 kHz rates): ±0.3 dB
Accuracy: ±5%
CW POWER SWEEP Distortion : <5% typical
Range: Sweeps between any two power levels at a single Incidental Phase Modulation
CW frequency.
(30% depth, 10 kHz rate): <0.2 radians
Resolution: 0.01 dB/step
Maximum Input: ±1V
Accuracy: Same as CW power accuracy.
Step Size: User-controlled, 0.01 dB to the full power range
of the instrument. INTERNAL AM GENERATOR
Step Dwell Time: Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds. If the Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative
sweep crosses a step attenuator setting, there will be a ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Å.
sweep dwell of approximately 20 ms to allow setting of the Rate:
step attenuator. 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
SWEEP FREQUENCY/STEP POWER forms
A power level step occurs after each frequency sweep. Resolution: 0.1 Hz
Power level remains constant for the length of time re- Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
quired to complete each sweep. Output: BNC connector, rear panel

POWER METER (Option 8) Â SCAN MODULATOR (Option 20)Ã

Internal Power Meter Range: +16 dBm to –35 dBm. Frequency Range: 1 to 20 GHz
Compatible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, or 6400-71 Se- Attenuation Range Ä: 0 to 60 dB
ries Detectors. Rear panel input. Flatness: ±2.0 dB, 0 to 40 dB
Power Meter Accuracy: ±3.5 dB, 40 to 60 dB
±1 dB (+10 dBm to –10 dBm) Step Response: <1 ms
±2 dB (–10 dBm to –35 dBm) Sensitivity: –10 dB/V
Power Meter Resolution: 0.1 dB minimum Insertion Loss (when on): <6 dB, 1 to 18 GHz
<8 dB, 18 to 20 GHz
Input: Rear-panel BNC connector

à Option 20 SCAN Modulator is available on models 68237B, 68245B, and

68247B only. When Option 20 SCAN Modulator is installed, Option 7 (Delete
AM/FM Generators) and Option 18 (mmWave Module Bias Output) are not
available.
Ä Maximum attenuation = attenuation range ± flatness.
 When Option 8 Power Meter is installed, Option 7 (Delete AM/FM ŠUser-defined waveforms are available with Option 10 Complex Modulation
Generators) is not available. Capability.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-7
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

FREQUENCY MODULATION PHASE MODULATION (FM) (Option 6)

External FM Input: Front or rear panel BNC, 50W or 600W External FM Input: Front or rear panel BNC (shares the
input impedance. All options selectable from modulation FM input), 50W or 600W input impedance. All options se-
menu. lectable from modulation menu.
FM Sensitivity: Continuously variable from ±10 kHz per FM Sensitivity: Continuously variable from ±0.0025 radi-
volt to ±20 MHz per volt (Locked, Locked Low-Noise, and ans per volt to ±5.0 radians per volt (Narrow FM mode) or
Unlocked Narrow FM modes) or ±100 kHz per volt to ±0.25 radians per volt to ±500.0 radians per volt (Wide FM
±100 MHz per volt (Unlocked Wide FM mode), selectable mode), selectable from modulation menu.
from modulation menu. (For 682X5B units, maximum sensitivity is divided by 2 from
(For 682X5B units, maximum sensitivity is divided by 2 from 1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.)
1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.) FM Deviation:
Maximum FM Deviation: Narrow Mode (DC to 8 MHz rates):
Locked Mode (1 kHz to 8 MHz rates): The lesser of ±3 radians or ±5 MHz/rate
The lesser of ±10 MHz or rate x 300 Wide Mode (DC to 1 MHz rates):
Locked Low-Noise Mode (DC to 500 kHz rates): The lesser of ±400 radians or ±10 MHz/rate
The lesser of ±10 MHz or rate x 3 (For 682X5B units, maximum deviation is divided by 2 from
Unlocked Narrow Mode (DC to 8 MHz rates): 1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.)
±10 MHz FM Bandwidth (3 dB, relative to 100 kHz rate):
Unlocked Wide Mode (DC to 100 Hz rates): Narrow Mode: DC to 10 MHz
±100 MHz Wide Mode: DC to 1 MHz
(For 682X5B units, maximum deviation is divided by 2 from FM Flatness:
1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.) Narrow Mode (DC to 1 MHz rates): ±1 dB
FM Bandwidth (3 dB): Wide Mode (DC to 500 kHz rates): ±1 dB
Locked Mode: 1 kHz to 10 MHz FM Accuracy (at 100 kHz sine wave):Æ 10%
Locked Low-Noise Mode: 30 kHz to 10 MHz Maximum Input: ±1V
Unlocked Narrow Mode: DC to 10 MHz
Unlocked Wide Mode: DC to 100 Hz INTERNAL FM GENERATOR
Flatness (Locked Mode 10 kHz to 1 MHz rates): ±1 dB (Shares the Internal FM Generator)
Accuracy (100 kHz rate):Æ 10% (5% typical) Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative
Incidental AM (±1 MHz deviation, 1 MHz rate): <2% ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Å.
Harmonic Distortion (±1 MHz deviation, 10 kHz rate):<1% Rate:
Maximum Input: ±1V 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
INTERNAL FM GENERATOR forms
Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative Resolution: 0.1 Hz
ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Å. Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
Rate: Output: BNC connector, rear panel
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
forms
Resolution: 0.1 Hz
Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
Output: BNC connector, rear panel

Å User-defined waveforms are available with Option 10 Complex Modulation

Capability.
Æ In external mode, accuracy applies at 1V peak input.

B-8 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

PULSE MODULATION Accuracy: 10 ns (5 ns typical)

Pulse modulation specifications apply at maximum rated Output: Video pulse and sync out, rear-panel BNC con-
power, unless otherwise noted. nectors.
On/Off Ratio: >80 dB
Rise/Fall Time (10 to 90%): <10 ns (<5 ns typical) Ç REMOTE OPERATION
Minimum Leveled Pulse Width:
All instrument functions, settings, and operating modes
<100 ns, ³2 GHz
(except for power on/standby) are controllable using com-
<1 ms, <2 GHz
mands sent from an external computer via the GPIB
Minimum Unleveled Pulse Width: <10 ns
(IEEE-488 interface bus).
Pulse Overshoot: <10% È
GPIB Address: Selectable from a system menu
Level Accuracy Relative to CW (100 Hz to 1 MHz PRF):
IEEE-488 Interface Function Subset:
±0.5 dB, ³1 ms pulse width
Source Handshake: SH1
±1.0 dB, <1 ms pulse width
Acceptor Handshake: AH1
Video Feedthrough: <±10 mV, ³2 GHz
Talker: T6
Pulse Width Compression: <8 ns typical
Listener: L4
Pulse Delay (typical):
Service Request: SR1
Mode Pulse Delay (ns) Remote/Local: RL1
Parallel Poll: PP1
External 50 Device Clear: DC1
Triggered 100 Device Trigger: DT1
Controller Capability: C0, C1, C2, C3, C28
Triggered with delay 200
Tri-State Driver: E2
GPIB Status Annunciators: When the instrument is oper-
ating in Remote, the GPIB status annunciators (listed be-
PRF Range: DC to 10 MHz unleveled low) will appear in a window on the front panel LCD.
100 Hz to 5 MHz leveled REMOTE: Operating on the GPIB (all instrument front
External Input: Front or rear-panel BNC, selectable from
panel keys except for the SYSTEM key and the RETURN
modulation menu.
Drive Level: TTL compatible input TO LOCAL soft-key will be ignored).
Input Logic: Positive-true or negative-true, selectable LLO (LOCAL LOCKOUT): Disables the RETURN TO
from modulation menu. LOCAL soft-key. Instrument can be placed in local mode
only via GPIB or by cycling line power.
INTERNAL PULSE GENERATOR Emulations: The instrument responds to the published
GPIB commands and responses of the ANRITSU Models
Modes: Free-run, triggered, gated, delayed, doublet,
6600, 6700, and 6XX00-series signal sources. When emu-
triplet, quadruplet. All modes selectable from modulation
lating another signal source, the instrument will be limited to
menus.
the capabilities, mnemonics, and parameter resolutions of
Clock Rate (Selectable) the emulated instrument.
Parameter
40 MHz 10 MHz

Pulse Width 25 ns to 419 ms 100 ns to 1.6s

Pulse Period É 250 ns to 419 ms 600 ns to 1.6s
Variable Delay
Single 0 to 419 ms 0 to 1.6s
Doublet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s
Triplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s
Quadruplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s
Resolution 25 ns 100 ns

Ç For 682X5B units, when operating below 1 GHz, rise/fall time is <15 ns.
È For 50 GHz, 60 GHz, and 65 GHz units, when operating above 40 Ghz,
pulse overshoot is <20% typical at rated power.
É Period must be at least 5 clock cycles longer than pulse widths + delays.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-9
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

GENERAL Warm Up Time (Standard Time Base):

From Standby: 30 minutes.
Stored Setups: Stores front panel settings and nine addi- From Cold Start (0°C): 120 hours to achieve <2 x 10–8
tional front-panel setups in a non-volatile RAM. A system
per day frequency stability.
menu allows saving and recalling of instrument setups.
Whenever the instrument is turned on, control settings Warm Up Time (Option 16 Time Base):
come on at the same functions and values existing when From Standby: 30 minutes
the instrument was turned off. From Cold Start (0°C): 120 hours to achieve <5 x
Memory Sequencing Input: Accepts a TTL low-level sig- 10–10 per day frequency stability.
nal to sequence through nine stored setups. AUX I/O con- Instruments disconnected from AC power for more than
nector, rear panel. 72 hours require 30 days to return to specified aging
Self-Test: Instrument self-test is performed when Selftest Power:
soft-key is selected. If an error is detected, an error mes- 90-132 Vac or 180-264 Vac, 48–440 Hz, 400 VA maximum
sage is displayed in a window on the LCD identifying the
Standby: With ac line power connected, unit is placed in
probable cause.
standby when front panel power switch is released from the
Secure Mode: Disables all frequency, power level, and
OPERATE position.
modulation state displays. Stored setups saved in secure
Weight: 23 kg (50 lb) maximum
mode remain secured when recalled. Mode selectable from
a system menu and GPIB. Dimensions:
Parameter Entry: Instrument-controlled parameters can 133 H x 429 W x 597 D mm
be entered in three ways—keypad, rotary data knob, or the (5.25 H x 16.875 W x 23.5 D in)
Ù and Ú touch pads of the cursor-control key. RF Output Connector:
The keypad is used to enter new parameter values; the Type K female, £40 GHz models
rotary data knob and the cursor-control key are used to Type V female, >40 GHz models.
edit existing parameter values. The < and > touch pads of
the cursor-control key move the cursor left and right one ENVIRONMENTAL
digit under the open parameter. The rotary data knob or
the Ù and Ú touch pads will increment or decrement the Storage Temperature Range: –40°C to +75°C.
digit position over the cursor. Operating Temperature Range: 0°C to +50°C.
Controlled parameters are frequency, power level, sweep Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% at 40°C.
time, dwell time, and number of steps. Altitude: 4,600 meters (15,000 ft) 17.3" Hg.
Keypad entries are terminated by pressing the appropri- EMI: Meets the radiated emission requirements of:
ate unit key (GHz/Sec/dBm, MHz/ms/dB, kHz/ms/STEPS, EN55011:1991/CISPR-11:1990 Group 1 Class A
or Hz/ns/ADRS). Edits are terminated by exiting the edit EN50082:1992/
menu. IEC 801-2:1992 - 4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
Reset: Returns all instrument parameters to predefined de- IEC 1000-4-3:1995 - 3 V/m
fault states or values. Any pending GPIB I/O is aborted. Se- IEC 801-4/1988 - 0.5 kV SL, 1 kV PL
lectable from the system menu. IEC 1000-4-5:1995 - 0.5 kV - 1 kV LN
Master/Slave Operation: Allows two 68XXXB output sig- 0.5 kV - 1 kV NG
nals to be swept with a user-selected frequency offset. One 0.5 kV - 1 kV GL
68XXXB synthesizer controls the other via AUX I/O and SE- MIL-STD-461C Part2 RE01, RE02, CE01, CE03,
RIAL I/O connections. Requires a Master/Slave Interface CS01, CS02, CS06, RS03
Cable Set (Part No. ND36329).
User Level Flatness Correction: Allows user to calibrate
out path loss due to external switching and cables via en-
tered power table from a GPIB power meter or calculated
data. When user level correction is activated, entered power
levels are delivered at the point where calibration was per-
formed. Supported power meters are ANRITSU ML4803A
and HP 437B, 438A, and 70100A. Five user tables are
available with up to 801 points/table.

B-10 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

INPUTS and OUTPUTS 10 MHz REF IN: Accepts an external 10 MHz ±100 Hz,
0 to +10 dBm time-base signal. Automatically disconnects
the internal high-stability time-base option, if installed. 50W
Input/Output Connectors impedance.
10 MHz REF OUT: Provides a 0.5 Vp-p, AC coupled,
Nomenclature Type Location 10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency standard.
50W impedance.
AM IN BNC Front & Rear Panel HORIZ OUT (Horizontal Sweep Output): Provides 0V at
FM/FM IN BNC Front & Rear Panel beginning and +10V at end of sweep for all sweep modes,
regardless of sweep width. In CW mode, the voltage is pro-
PULSE TRIGGER portional to frequency between 0V at low end and +10V at
BNC Front & Rear Panel
IN the high end of range. In CW mode, if CW RAMP is en-
EXT ALC IN BNC Front & Rear Panel abled, a repetitive, 0V to +10V ramp is provided.
SEQ SYNC OUT (Sequential Sync Output): Provides a
K-Connector Standard-Front Panel +5V signal during retrace, at bandswitching points, and dur-
RF OUTPUT
V-Connector Option 9-Rear Panel ing each frequency step in step sweep mode, –5V during
10 MHz REF IN BNC Rear Panel markers, and –10V during the selected marker.
AM OUT: Provides video modulating signal from the inter-
10 MHz REF OUT BNC Rear Panel nal AM generator.
HORIZ OUT BNC Rear Panel FM OUT: Provides video modulating signal from the inter-
nal FM generator.
SEQ SYNC OUT BNC Rear Panel PULSE VIDEO OUT: Provides video modulating signal
AM OUT BNC Rear Panel from the internal pulse generator or external pulse input.
PULSE SYNC OUT: Provides a TTL compatible signal
FM OUT BNC Rear Panel synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output.
PULSE VIDEO DWELL IN: Accepts an external TTL low-level signal to
BNC Rear Panel pause the sweep in step sweep mode. The sweep resumes
OUT
when the signal is removed.
PULSE SYNC V/GHz OUT: Provides a reference voltage relative to the
BNC Rear Panel
OUT RF output frequency (refer to the table below).
DWELL IN BNC Rear Panel
Model Number V/GHz Output
V/GHz OUT BNC Rear Panel
AUX I/O 25-pin D-type Rear Panel 68237B, 68245B, 68247B 1.0V/GHz

SERIAL I/O RJ45 Rear Panel 68253B, 68255B, 68259B 0.5V/GHz

IEEE-488 GPIB Type 57 Rear Panel 68263B, 68265B, 68269B 0.5V/GHz

68275B, 68277B 0.25V/GHz
68285B, 68287B 0.25V/GHz
AM IN: Accepts an external signal to amplitude modulate
the RF output signal. Front or rear-panel input, 50W or 600W 68295B, 68297B 0.25V/GHz
impedance, both selectable from front-panel modulation
menu.
FM/FM IN: Accepts an external signal to frequency/phase AUX I/O (Auxiliary Input/Output): Provides for most of
modulate the RF output signal. Front or rear-panel input, the rear panel BNC connections through a single, 25-pin,
50W or 600W impedance, both selectable from front-panel D-type connector. Supports master-slave operation with an-
modulation menu. other 682XXB signal generator or allows for a single-cable
PULSE TRIGGER IN: Accepts an external TTL compatible interface with the Model 562 Scalar Network Analyzer and
signal to pulse modulate the RF output signal or trigger or other ANRITSU instruments. For a pinout diagram and de-
gate the internal pulse generator. Front or rear-panel input, scriptions, see Appendix A, Figure A-2.
selectable from front-panel modulation menu. SERIAL I/O (Serial Input/Output): Provides access to
EXT ALC IN (External ALC Input): Provides for leveling RS-232 terminal ports to support service and calibration
the RF output signal externally with either a detector or functions and master-slave operations.
power meter. Signal requirements are shown in the RF Out- IEEE-488 GPIB: Provides input/output connections for the
put specifications on page B-6. General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). For a pinout dia-
RF OUTPUT: Provides for RF output from 50W impedance gram, see Appendix A, Figure A-3.
source. K or V Connector, female. Option 9 moves the RF
Output connector to the rear panel.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-11
PERFORMANCE SERIES 682XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

OPTIONS Option 10, Complex Modulation Capability: Provides

user-defined waveform capability for complex modulation.
Option 1, Rack Mounting: Rack mount kit containing a Requires computer/controller (not included). Includes cable
set of track slides (90° tilt capability), mounting ears, and and Windows based software. (Not available in combination
front panel handles to let the instrument be mounted in a with Option 7.)
standard 19-inch equipment rack. Option 11, 0.1 Hz Frequency Resolution: Provides fre-
Option 2A, 110 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step quency resolution of 0.1 Hz.
attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high-end Option 14, ANRITSU 360B VNA Compatibility: Modifies
frequency of £26.5 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. rack mounting hardware to mate unit in a ANRITSU 360B
Option 2B, 110 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step VNA console.
attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high-end Option 15B, High Power Output: Adds high-power RF
frequency of £40 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. components to the instrument in the 2-26.5 GHz frequency
Option 2C, 90 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step range. Option 15B is standard in models having a high-end
attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high-end frequency that is >40 GHz.
frequency of £50 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. Option 16, High-Stability Time Base: Adds an ovenized,
Option 2D, 90 dB Step Attenutor: Adds a 10 dB/step 10 MHz crystal oscillator as a high-stability time base.
attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high-end Option 17A, Delete Front Panel: Deletes the front panel
frequency of £60 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. for use in remote control applications where a front panel
Option 6, Phase Modulation (FM): Adds phase modula- display and keyboard control are not needed.
tion capability. The internal FM generator becomes the Option 18, mmWave Module Bias Output: Provides bias
FM/FM generator. (Not available in combination with Option output for 54000-xWRxx Millimeter Wave Source Modules.
7.) BNC Twinax connector, rear panel. (Not available in combi-
Option 7, Delete AM/FM Generator: Deletes the internal nation with Option 20).
AM and FM generators. External AM and FM capability re- Option 19, SCPI Programmability: Adds GPIB command
mains unchanged. (Not available in combination with Option mnemonics complying with Standard Commands for Pro-
6, 8, or 20.) grammable Instruments (SCPI), Version 1993.0 SCPI pro-
Option 8, Internal Power Meter: Adds an internal power gramming complies with IEEE 488.2-1987.
meter that is compatible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, or Option 20, SCAN Modulator: Adds an internal SCAN
6400-71 series detectors. (Not available in combination with modulator for simulating high-depth amplitude modulated
Option 7.) signals in models 68237B, 68245B, and 68247B only. Re-
Option 9, Rear Panel RF Output: Moves the RF output quires an external modulating signal input. (Not available in
connector to the rear panel. combination with Option 7 or 18.)

B-12 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Series 683XXB
Synthesized Signal Generator
Performance Specifications
MODEL SUMMARY 10 MHz Reference Output: 0.5 Vp-p into 50W,AC cou-
pled. Rear panel BNC; 50W impedance.
Switching Time (typical maximum): <40 ms to be within
Model Frequency Range
1 kHz of final frequency.
68337B 2.0 to 20.0 GHz
ANALOG SWEEP MODE
68345B 0.5 to 20.0 GHz Sweep Width: Independently selected from 1 MHz to full
68347B 0.01 to 20.0 GHz range continuous sweep.
Accuracy: The lessor of:
68353B 2.0 to 26.5 GHz ±30 MHz or ±(2 MHz + 0.25% of sweep width) for sweep
68355B 0.5 to 26.5 GHz speeds of £50 MHz/ms.
68359B 0.01 to 26.5 GHz Sweep Time Range: 30 ms to 99 seconds

68363B 2.0 to 40.0 GHz PHASE-LOCKED STEP SWEEP MODE

68365B 0.5 to 40.0 GHz Sweep Width: Independently selected, 1 kHz (0.1 Hz with
Option 11) to full range. Every frequency step in sweep
68369B 0.01 to 40.0 GHz
range is phase-locked.
68375B 0.5 to 50.0 GHz Accuracy: Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base.
68377B 0.01 to 50.0 GHz Resolution (Minimum Step Size):
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11)
68385B 0.5 to 60.0 GHz Steps: User-selectable number of steps or the step size.
68387B 0.01 to 60.0 GHz Number of Steps: Variable from 1 to 10,000
0.5 to 65.0 GHz Step Size: 1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11) to the full fre-
68395B quency range of the instrument. (If the step size does not
(with usable output to 67 GHz)
divide into the selected frequency range, the last step is
0.01 to 65.0 GHz truncated.)
68397B
(with usable output to 67 GHz) Dwell Time Per Step: Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds
Switching Time (typical maximum): <15 ms +
FREQUENCY 1 ms/GHz step size or <40 ms, whichever is less.
CW MODE ALTERNATE SWEEP MODE
Output: Twenty independent, presettable CW frequencies Sweeps alternately in analog or step sweep between any
(F0 – F9 and M0 – M9). two sweep ranges. Each sweep range may be associated
Accuracy: Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base.
with a different power level.
Internal Time Base Stability:
With Aging: <2 x 10-8/day
MANUAL SWEEP MODE
(<5 x 10–10/day with Option 16)
Provides stepped, phase-locked adjustment of frequency
With Temperature: <2 x 10-8/°C over 0°C to 55°C
between sweep limits. User-selectable number of steps or
(<2 x 10-10/°C with Option 16)
step size.
Resolution:
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11)
360B VNA SOURCE LOCK MODE
External 10 MHz Reference Input: Accepts external
Under control of the ANRITSU 360B Vector Network Ana-
10 MHz ±100 Hz, 0 to +10 dBm time base signal. Automati-
cally disconnects the internal high-stability time-base option, lyzer, the synthesized signal generator is phase-locked at a
if installed. BNC, rear panel, 50W impedance. typical <8.5 ms/step sweep speed. Frequency resolution is
limited to 100 kHz.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-13
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

PROGRAMMABLE FREQUENCY AGILITY Harmonic and Harmonic Related (Models having a

Under GPIB control, up to 1000 non-sequential frequencies high-end frequency of >40 GHz and units with Option
can be stored and then addressed as a phase-locked step 15B at maximum specified leveled output power):
sweep. Data stored in volatile memory. 500 MHz to £2.2 GHz (683X5B): <–50 dBc
10 MHz to £50 MHz: <–30 dBc
MARKERS >50 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc
Up to 20 independent, settable markers (F0 – F9 and >2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 683X5B) to £20 GHz: <–50 dBc
M0 – M9). >20 GHz to £40 GHz: <–40 dBc
Video Markers: +5V or –5V marker output, selectable 50 GHz units; >40 GHz to £50 GHz: <–40 dBc
from system menus. AUX I/O connector, rear panel. 60 GHz units; >40 GHz to £60 GHz: <–30 dBc
Intensity Markers (Available in Analog Sweeps of 65 GHz units; >40 GHz to £45 GHz: <–25 dBc
<1 Second Sweep Time): Produces an intensified dot on >45 GHz to £65 GHz: <–30 dBc
trace, obtained by momentary dwell in RF sweep. Nonharmonics:
Marker Accuracy: Same as sweep frequency accuracy. 500 MHz to £2.2 GHz (683X5B): <–50 dBc
Marker Resolution (Analog Sweep): 10 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc
1 MHz or Sweep Width/4096, whichever is greater. >2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 683X5B) to £65 GHz: <–60 dBc
Marker Resolution (Step Sweep):
1 kHz (0.1 Hz with Option 11) SINGLE-SIDEBAND PHASE NOISE
(dBc/Hz)
SWEEP TRIGGERING
Sweep triggering is provided for Analog Frequency Sweep,
Offset From Carrier
Step Frequency Sweep, and CW Power Sweep. Frequency
Auto: Triggers sweep automatically. (GHz)
100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz
External: Triggers a sweep on the low to high transition of
an external TTL signal. AUX I/O connector, rear panel. 0.6
Single: Triggers, aborts, and resets a single sweep. Reset –87 –100 –98 –115
(683X5B)
sweep may be selected to be at the top or bottom of the
sweep. The pen lift will activate at sweep speeds ³1 sec- 0.6 –77 –88 –86 –100
ond. 2.0
–81 –94 –92 –109
(683X5B)
SPECTRAL PURITY
2.0 –80 –88 –86 –102
All specifications apply to the phase-locked CW or Step
6.0 –78 –88 –86 –102
Sweep modes at the lesser of +10 dBm output or maxi-
mum specified leveled output power, unless otherwise 10.0 –73 –86 –83 –102
noted. 20.0 –66 –78 –78 –100
26.5 –63 –78 –76 –96
SPURIOUS SIGNALS
Harmonic and Harmonic Related: 40.0 –60 –75 –72 –94
500 Mhz to £2.2 GHz (683X5B): <–50 dBc 50.0 –54 –69 –66 –88
10 MHz to £50 MHz: <–30 dBc
65.0 –54 –69 –64 –88
>50 MHz to £2 GHz: <–40 dBc
>2 GHz (2.2 GHz for 683X5B) to £20 GHz: <–60 dBc
>20 GHz to £40 GHz: <–40 dBc

B-14 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

POWER LINE and FAN ROTATION SPURIOUS AM Noise Floor:

EMISSIONS (dBc) Typically –145 dBm/Hz at 0 dBm output and offsets
>5 MHz from carrier.
Frequency Offset From Carrier
Range RF OUTPUT
(GHz) <300 Hz 300Hz to 1 kHz >1 kHz
Power level specifications apply at 25° ±10°C.
0.5 to £1.0 MAXIMUM LEVELED OUTPUT POWER
<–62 <–72 <–72
(683X5B)
>1.0 to £2.2 Frequency Output
Output Power
<–56 <–66 <–66 Model with Step
(683X5B)
Range Power
Number Attenuator
0.01 (>2.2 to (GHz) (dBm)
<–50 <–60 <–60 (dBm)
683X5B) to £8.4
>8.4 to £20 <–46 <–56 <–60 68337B 2.0 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
>20 to £40 <–40 <–50 <–54 68345B 0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0

>40 to £65 <–34 <–44 <–48 68347B 0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
68353B
>20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
RESIDUAL FM
(50 Hz - 15 kHz BW) 0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0
68355B >2.2 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
Frequency Range Residual FM
(GHz) (Hz RMS) 0.01 to £2.0 +13.0 +11.0
68359B >2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
0.5 to £1.0 >20.0 to £26.5 +6.0 +3.5
<30
(683X5B) 2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
68363B
>1.0 to £2.2 >20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
<60 0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0
(683X5B)
68365B >2.2 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
0.01 (>2.2 to 683X5B) >20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
<120
to £8.4
0.01 to £2.0 +13.0 +11.0
>8.4 to £20 <220 68369B >2.0 to £20.0 +9.0 +7.0
>20.0 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
>20 to £40 <440
>40 to £65 <880 0.5 to £2.2 +11.0
+10.0
>2.2 to £20.0 +10.0
68375B +8.5
>20.0 to £40.0 +2.5
0.0
RESIDUAL FM >40.0 to £50.0 +2.5
–1.0
(Analog Sweep and Unlocked FM modes, 50 Hz - 15
0.01 to £2.0 +12.0 +10.0
kHz BW) >2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
68377B
>20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
Frequency Unlocked Narrow Unlocked Wide >40.0 to £50.0 +2.5 –1.0
Range FM Mode FM Mode or Analog
0.5 to £2.2 +11.0 +10.0
(GHz) (kHz RMS) Sweep (kHz RMS)
>2.2 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
0.5 to £1.0 68385B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
<1.25 <6.3 >40.0 to £50.0 +2.0 –1.5
(683X5B) >50.0 to £60.0 +2.0 –2.0
>1.0 to £2.2 0.5 to £2.0 +12.0 +10.0
<2.5 <12.5
(683X5B) >2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 +8.5
0.01 (>2.2 for 68387B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 0.0
<5 <25 >40.0 to £50.0 +2.0 –1.5
683X5B) to £20
>50.0 to £60.0 +2.0 –2.0
>20 to £40 <10 <50
>40 to £65 <20 <100

682XXB/683XXB OM B-15
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

MAXIMUM LEVELED OUTPUT POWER (Continued) UNLEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE (typical)
Without an Attenuator: >40 dB below max power.
Output Power With an Attenuator: >130 dB below max power.
Frequency Output
Model with Step
Range Power
Number Attenuator POWER LEVEL SWITCHING TIME (to within specified
(GHz) (dBm)
(dBm) accuracy):
0.5 to 2.2 +11.0
Without Change in Step Attenuator: <1 ms typical
>2.2 to £20.0 +10.0 With Change in Step Attenuator: <20 ms typical
Not
68395B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5
Available
>40.0 to £50.0 0.0 ACCURACY AND FLATNESS
>50.0 to £65.0 –2.0 Step Sweep and CW Modes
0.5 to £2.0 +12.0 Frequency
>2.0 to £20.0 +10.0 Attenuation
(GHz)
Not
68397B >20.0 to £40.0 +2.5 Below
Available 0.01-
>40.0 to £50.0 0.0 Max Power 0.05-20 20-40 40-50 50-60 60-65
0.05
>50.0 to £65.0 –2.0
Accuracy:
With Option 15B (High Power) Installed 0-25 dB Á ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.5 dB ±1.5 dB ±1.5 dB
68337B 2.0 to 20.0 +17.0 +15.0 25-60 dB ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.5 dB ±3.5 dBÀ N/A
0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0 >60 dB ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±2.5 dBÀ ±3.5 dBÀ N/A
68345B
>2.2 to £20.0 +17.0 +15.0 Flatness:
68347B
0.5 to £2.2 +13.0 +11.0 0-25 dB Á ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±1.1 dB ±1.1 dB ±1.1 dB
>2.2 to £20.0 +17.0 +15.0
25-60 dB ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±1.1 dB ±3.1 dBÀ N/A
2.0 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
68353B
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5 >60 dB ±2.0 dB ±0.8 dB ±0.8 dB ±1.1 dBÀ ±3.1 dBÀ N/A

0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0

68355B
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5 Analog Sweep Mode (typical)
0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
68359B
>20.0 to £26.5 +10.0 +7.5 Frequency
Attenuation
2 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0 (GHz)
68363B Below
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
Max Power
0.5 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0 0.01-0.05 0.05-20 20-40 40-65
68365B
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
Accuracy
0.01 to £20.0 +13.0 +11.0
68369B 0-12 dB ±2.0 dB ±2.0 dB ±2.0 dB ±3.0 dB
>20 to £40.0 +6.0 +3.0
68375B 0.5 to 50.0 Standard Standard 0-30 dB ±3.5 dB ±3.5 dB ±4.6 dB ±5.6 dB
68377B 0.01 to 50.0 Standard Standard 30-60 dB ±4.0 dB ±4.0 dB ±5.2 dB ±6.2 dB
68385B 0.5 to 60.0 Standard Standard 60-122 dB ±5.0 dB ±5.0 dB ±6.2 dB ±7.2 dB
68387B 0.01 to 60.0 Standard Standard Flatness
68395B 0.5 to 65.0 Standard Not Available 0-12 dB ±2.0 dB ±1.0 dB ±2.0 dB ±2.5 dB
68397B 0.01 to 65.0 Standard Not Available 0-30 dB ±3.5 dB ±3.0 dB ±4.1 dB ±5.1 dB
30-60 dB ±3.5 dB ±3.5 dB ±4.6 dB ±5.6 dB

LEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE

Without an Attenuator: Maximum leveled power to
–15 dBm (–20 dBm typical). For units with Option 15B in-
stalled, minimum settable power is –5 dBm (–10 dBm typi-
cal).
With an Attenuator: Maximum leveled power to
–115 dBm (–120 dBm typical). For 68375B,68377B,
68385B, 68387B, and units with Option 15B installed, À Typical
minimum settable power is –105 dBm (–110 dBm typical). Á 0 to 25 dB or to minimum rated power, whichever is higher

B-16 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

OTHER OUTPUT POWER SPECIFICATIONS SWEEP FREQUENCY/STEP POWER

Output Power Resolution: 0.01 dB A power level step occurs after each frequency sweep.
Source Impedance: 50W nomimal Power level remains constant for the length of time re-
Source SWR (Internal Leveling): quired to complete each sweep.
Without Attenuator: <1.7 at <2 GHz typical
<1.6 at 2 to 20 GHz typical POWER METER (Option 8) Â
<2.0 at >20 GHz typical Internal Power Meter Range: +16 dBm to –35 dBm.
With Attenuator: <2.0 typical Compatible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, and 6400-71
Power Level Stability with Temperature: Series Detectors. Rear panel input.
0.04 dB/°C typical Power Meter Accuracy:
Level Offset: Offsets the displayed power level to estab- ±1 dB (+10 dBm to –10 dBm)
lish a new reference level. ±2 dB (–10 dBm to –35 dBm)
OUTPUT ON/OFF: Toggles the RF output between an Off Power Meter Resolution: 0.1 dB minimum
and On state. During the Off state, the RF oscillator is
turned off. The On or Off state is indicated by two LEDs lo- MODULATION
cated below the OUTPUT ON/OFF key on the front panel.
RF On/Off Between Frequency Steps: System menu se- AMPLITUDE MODULATION
lection of RF On or RF Off during frequency switching in All amplitude modulation specifications apply at 50%
CW or Step Sweep modes. depth, 1 kHz rate, with RF level set 6 dB below maximum
RF On/Off During Retrace: System menu selection of RF specified leveled output power, unless otherwise noted.
On or RF Off during retrace.
External AM Input: Log AM or Linear AM input, front or
Internal Leveling: Power is leveled at the output connec-
rear-panel BNC, 50W or 600W input impedance. All options
tor in all modes.
selectable from modulation menu.
External Leveling:
AM Sensitivity:
External Detector: Levels output power at a remote
Log AM: Continuously variable from 0 dB/volt to
detector location. Accepts a positive or negative 0.5 mV to
25 dB/volt
500 mV input signal from the remote detector. EXT ALC
Linear AM: Continuously variable from 0% per volt to
ADJ adjusts the input signal range to an optimum value.
100% per volt
BNC connector, front and rear panel.
AM Depth (typical ): 0-90% linear; 20 dB log
External Power Meter: Levels output power at a re-
AM Bandwidth (3 dB): DC to 50 kHz minimum
mote power meter location. Accepts a ±1V full scale input DC to 100 kHz typical
signal from the remote power meter. EXT ALC ADJ ad- Flatness (DC to 10 kHz rates): 0.3 dB
justs the input signal range to an optimum value. BNC Accuracy: ±5%
connector, front and rear panel. Distortion: <5% typical
External Leveling Bandwidth: Incidental Phase Modulation (30% depth, 10 kHz rate):
30 kHz typical in Detector mode. <0.2 radians typical
0.7 Hz typical in Power Meter mode. Maximum Input: ±1V
User Level Flatness Correction:
Number of points: 2 to 801 points per table INTERNAL AM GENERATOR
Number of tables: 5 available Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative
Entry modes: GPIB power meter or computed data ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Ã.
Rate:
CW POWER SWEEP 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
Range: Sweeps between any two power levels at a single 0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
CW frequency. forms
Resolution: 0.01 dB/step Resolution: 0.1 Hz
Accuracy: Same as CW power accuracy. Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
Step Size: User-controlled, 0.01 dB to the full power range Output: BNC connector, rear panel
of the instrument.
Step Dwell Time: Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds. If the
sweep crosses a step attenuator setting, there will be a
sweep dwell of approximately 20 ms to allow setting of the
step attenuator.
 When Option 8 Power Meter is installed, Option 7 (Delete AM/FM
Generators) is not available.
à User-defined waveforms are available with Option 10, Complex Modulation
Capability.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-17
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

FREQUENCY MODULATION PHASE MODULATION (FM) (Option 6)

External FM Input: Front or rear panel BNC, 50W or 600W External FM Input: Front or rear panel BNC (shares the
input impedance. All options selectable from modulation FM input), 50W or 600W input impedance. All options se-
menu. lectable from modulation menu.
FM Sensitivity: Continuously variable from ±10 kHz per FM Sensitivity: Continuously variable from ±0.0025 radi-
volt to ±20 MHz per volt (Locked, and Unlocked Narrow FM ans per volt to ±5.0 radians per volt (Narrow FM mode) or
modes) or ±100 kHz per volt to ±100 MHz per volt (Un- ±0.25 radians per volt to ±500.0 radians per volt (Wide FM
locked Wide FM mode), selectable from modulation menu. mode), selectable from modulation menu.
(For 683X5B units, maximum sensitivity is divided by 2 from (For 683X5B units, maximum sensitivity is divided by 2 from
1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz) 1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.)
Maximum FM Deviation: FM Deviation:
Locked Mode (1 kHz to 8 MHz rates): Narrow Mode (DC to 8 MHz rates):
The lesser of ±10 MHz or rate x 300 The lesser of ±3 radians or ±5 MHz/rate
Locked Low-Noise Mode (50 kHz to 8 MHz rates): Wide Mode (DC to 1 MHz rates):
The lesser of ±10 MHz or rate x 3 The lesser of ±400 radians or ±10 MHz/rate
Unlocked Narrow Mode (DC to 8 MHz rates): (For 683X5B units, maximum deviation is divided by 2 from
±10 MHz 1.0 to 2.2 GHz and divided by 4 from 0.5 to 1.0 GHz.)
Unlocked Wide Mode (DC to 100 Hz rates): FM Bandwidth (3 dB, relative to 100 kHz rate):
±100 MHz Narrow Mode: DC to 10 MHz
(For 683X5B units, maximum deviation is divided by 2 from Wide Mode: DC to 1 MHz
1.0 to 2.2 GHz and is divided by 4 from 500 MHz to FM Flatness:
1 GHz.) Narrow Mode (DC to 1 MHz rates): ±1 dB
FM Bandwidth (3 dB): Wide Mode (DC to 500 kHz rates): ±1 dB
Locked Mode: 1 kHz to 10 MHz FM Accuracy (at 100 kHz sine wave): Ä 10%
Locked Low-Noise Mode: 30 kHz to 10 MHz Maximum Input: ±1V
Unlocked Narrow Mode: DC to 10 MHz
Unlocked Wide Mode: DC to 100 Hz INTERNAL FM GENERATOR
Flatness (Locked Mode 10 kHz to 1 MHz rates): ±1 dB (Shares the Internal FM Generator)
Accuracy (100 kHz rate): Ä 10% (5% typical) Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative
Incidental AM (±1 MHz deviation, 1 MHz rate): <2% ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Ã.
Harmonic Distortion (±1 MHz deviation, 10 kHz rate):<1% Rate:
Maximum Input: ±1V 0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
INTERNAL FM GENERATOR forms
Waveforms: Sine, square, triangle, positive ramp, negative Resolution: 0.1 Hz
ramp, Gaussian noise, uniform noise, user-defined Ã. Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
Rate: Output: BNC connector, rear panel
0.1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave
0.1 Hz to 100 kHz for square, triangle, and ramp wave-
forms
Resolution: 0.1 Hz
Accuracy: Same as instrument timebase.
Output: BNC connector, rear panel

à User-defined waveforms are available with Option 10, Complex Modulation

Capability.
Ä In external mode, accuracy applies at 1V peak input.

B-18 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

PULSE MODULATION Accuracy: 10 ns (5 ns typical)

Pulse modulation specifications apply at maximum rated Output: Video pulse and sync out, rear-panel BNC con-
power, unless otherwise noted. nectors.
On/Off Ratio: >80 dB SCAN MODULATOR (Option 20) È
Rise/Fall Time (10 to 90%): <10 ns (<5 ns typical) Å Frequency Range: 1 to 20 GHz
Minimum Leveled Pulse Width: Attenuation Range: É 0 to 60 dB
<100 ns, ³2 GHz Flatness: ±2.0 dB, 0 to 40 dB
<1 ms, <2 GHz ±3.5 dB, 40 to 60 dB
Minimum Unleveled Pulse Width: <10 ns Sensitivity: –10 dB/V
Pulse Overshoot: <10% Æ Insertion Loss (when on): <6 dB, 1 to 18 GHz
<8 dB, 18 to 20 GHz
Level Accuracy Relative to CW (100 Hz to 1 MHz PRF): Input: Rear-panel BNC connector
±0.5 dB, ³1 mms pulse width
±1.0 dB, <1 ms pulse width
Video Feedthrough: <±10 mV, ³2 GHz
REMOTE OPERATION
Pulse Width Compression: <8 ns typical All instrument functions, settings, and operating modes
Pulse Delay (typical): (except for power on/standby) are controllable using com-
mands sent from an external computer via the GPIB
Mode Pulse Delay (ns)
(IEEE-488 interface bus).
External 50 GPIB Address: Selectable from a system menu
IEEE-488 Interface Function Subset:
Triggered 100 Source Handshake: SH1
Triggered with delay 200 Acceptor Handshake: AH1
Talker: T6
Listener: L4
PRF Range: DC to 10 MHz unleveled Service Request: SR1
100 Hz to 5 MHz leveled Remote/Local: RL1
External Input: Front or rear-panel BNC, selectable from Parallel Poll: PP1
modulation menu.
Device Clear: DC1
Drive Level: TTL compatible input
Device Trigger: DT1
Input Logic: Positive-true or negative-true, selectable
Controller Capability: C0, C1, C2, C3, C28
from modulation menu.
Tri-State Driver: E2
GPIB Status Annunciators: When the instrument is oper-
INTERNAL PULSE GENERATOR
ating in Remote, the GPIB status annunciators (listed be-
Modes: Free-run, triggered, gated, delayed, doublet, trip- low) will appear in a window on the front panel LCD.
let, quadruplet. All modes selectable from modulation REMOTE: Operating on the GPIB (all instrument front
menus.
panel keys except for the SYSTEM key and the RETURN
TO LOCAL soft-key will be ignored).
Clock Rate (Selectable)
LLO (LOCAL LOCKOUT): Disables the RETURN TO
Parameter
LOCAL soft-key. Instrument can be placed in local mode
40 MHz 10 MHz
only via GPIB or by cycling line power.
Pulse Width 25 ns to 419 ms 100 ns to 1.6s Emulations: The instrument responds to the published
GPIB commands and responses of the ANRITSU Models
Pulse Period Ç 250 ns to 419 ms 600 ns to 1.6s 6600, 6700, 6XX00-series signal sources. When emulating
Variable Delay another signal source, the instrument will be limited to the
Single 0 to 419 ms 0 to 1.6s capabilities, mnemonics, and parameter resolutions of the
Doublet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s emulated instrument.
Triplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s
Quadruplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1.6s
Resolution 25 ns 100 ns

Å For 683X5B units, operating below 1.0 GHz, rise/fall time is <15 ns. È Option 20 SCAN Modulator is available on models 68337B, 68345B, and
Æ For 50 GHz, 60 GHz, and 65 GHz units, when operating above 40 Ghz, 68347B only. When Option 20 SCAN Modulator is installed, Option 7 (Delete
AM/FM Generators)and Option 18 (mmWave Module Bias Output) are not
pulse overshoot is <20% typical at rated power.
Ç Period must be at least 5 clock cycles longer than pulse widths + delays. available.
É Maximum attenuation = attenuation range ± flatness.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-19
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

GENERAL Warm Up Time (Standard Time Base):

From Standby: 30 minutes.
Stored Setups: Stores front panel settings and nine addi- From Cold Start (0°C): 120 hours to achieve <2 x 10–8
tional front-panel setups in a non-volatile RAM. A system
per day frequency stability.
menu allows saving and recalling of instrument setups.
Whenever the instrument is turned on, control settings Warm Up Time (Option 16 Time Base):
come on at the same functions and values existing when From Standby: 30 minutes
the instrument was turned off. From Cold Start (0°C): 120 hours to achieve <5 x
Memory Sequencing Input: Accepts a TTL low-level sig- 10–10 per day frequency stability.
nal to sequence through nine stored setups. AUX I/O con- Instruments disconnected from AC power for more than
nector, rear panel. 72 hours require 30 days to return to specified aging.
Self-Test: Instrument self-test is performed when Selftest Power:
soft-key is selected. If an error is detected, an error mes- 90-132 Vac or 180-264 Vac, 48–440 Hz, 400 VA maximum
sage is displayed in a window on the LCD identifying the
Standby: With ac line power connected, unit is placed in
probable cause and remedy.
standby when front panel power switch is released from the
Secure Mode: Disables all frequency, power level, and
OPERATE position.
modulation state displays. Stored setups saved in secure
Weight: 23 kg (50 lb) maximum
mode remain secured when recalled. Mode selectable from
a system menu. Dimensions:
Parameter Entry: Instrument-controlled parameters can 133 H x 429 W x 597 D mm
be entered in three ways—keypad, rotary data knob, or the (5.25 H x 16.875 W x 23.5 D in)
Ù and Ú touch pads of the cursor-control key. RF Output Connector:
The keypad is used to enter new parameter values; the Type K female, £40 GHz models
rotary data knob and the cursor-control key are used to Type V female, >40 GHz models
edit existing parameter values. The < and > touch pads of
the cursor-control key move the cursor left and right one ENVIRONMENTAL
digit under the open parameter. The rotary data knob or
the Ù and Ú touch pads will increment or decrement the Storage Temperature Range: –40°C to +75°C.
digit position over the cursor. Operating Temperature Range: 0°C to +50°C.
Controlled parameters are frequency, power level, sweep Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% at 40°C.
time, dwell time, and number of steps. Altitude: 4,600 meters (15,000 ft), 17.3" Hg.
Keypad entries are terminated by pressing the appropri- EMI: Meets the radiated emission requirements of:
ate unit key (GHz/Sec/dBm, MHz/ms/dB, kHz/ms/STEPS, EN55011:1991/CISPR-11:1990 Group 1 Class A
or Hz/ns/ADRS). Edits are terminated by exiting the edit EN50082:1992/
menu. IEC 801-2:1992 - 4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
Reset: Returns all instrument parameters to predefined de- IEC 1000-4-3:1995 - 3 V/m
fault states or values. Any pending GPIB I/O is aborted. Se- IEC 801-4/1988 - 0.5 kV SL, 1 kV PL
lectable from the system menu. IEC 1000-4-5:1995 - 0.5 kV - 1 kV LN
Master/Slave Operation: Allows two 68XXXB output sig- 0.5 kV - 1 kV NG
nals to be swept with a user-selected frequency offset. One 0.5 kV - 1 kV GL
68XXXB synthesizer controls the other via AUX I/O and SE- MIL-STD-461C Part 2 RE01, RE02, CE01, CE03,
RIAL I/O connections. Requires a Master/Slave Interface CS01, CS02, CS06, RS03
Cable Set (Part No. ND36329).
User Level Flatness Correction: Allows user to calibrate
out path loss due to external switching and cables via en-
tered power table from a GPIB power meter or calculated
data. When user level correction is activated, entered power
levels are delivered at the point where calibration was per-
formed. Supported power meters are ANRITSU ML4803A
and HP 437B, 438A, and 70100A. Five user tables are
available with up to 801 points/table.

B-20 682XXB/683XXB OM
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

INPUTS and OUTPUTS 10 MHz REF IN: Accepts an external 10 MHz ±100 Hz,
0 to +10 dBm time-base signal. Automatically disconnects
Input/Output Connectors the internal high-stability time-base option, if installed. 50W
impedance.
10 MHz REF OUT: Provides a 0.5 Vp-p, AC coupled,
Nomenclature Type Location
10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency standard.
AM IN BNC Front & Rear Panel 50W impedance.
HORIZ OUT (Horizontal Sweep Output): Provides 0V at
FM/FM IN BNC Front & Rear Panel beginning and +10V at end of sweep for all sweep modes,
PULSE TRIGGER regardless of sweep width. In CW mode, the voltage is pro-
BNC Front & Rear Panel portional to frequency between 0V at low end and +10V at
IN
the high end of range. In CW mode, if CW RAMP is en-
EXT ALC IN BNC Front & Rear Panel abled, a repetitive, 0V to +10V ramp is provided.
K-Connector Standard-Front Panel SEQ SYNC OUT (Sequential Sync Output): Provides a
RF OUTPUT +5V signal during retrace, at bandswitching points, and dur-
V-Connector Option 9-Rear Panel
ing each frequency step in step sweep mode, –5V during
10 MHz REF IN BNC Rear Panel markers, and –10V during the selected marker.
AM OUT: Provides video modulating signal from the inter-
10 MHz REF OUT BNC Rear Panel
nal AM generator.
HORIZ OUT BNC Rear Panel FM OUT: Provides video modulating signal from the inter-
nal FM generator.
SEQ SYNC OUT BNC Rear Panel
PULSE VIDEO OUT: Provides video modulating signal
AM OUT BNC Rear Panel from the internal pulse generator or external pulse input.
FM OUT BNC Rear Panel PULSE SYNC OUT: Provides a TTL compatible signal
synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output.
PULSE VIDEO DWELL IN: Accepts an external TTL low-level signal to
BNC Rear Panel
OUT pause the sweep in both analog and step sweep modes.
The sweep resumes when the signal is removed.
PULSE SYNC
BNC Rear Panel V/GHz OUT: Provides a reference voltage relative to the
OUT RF output frequency (refer to the table below).
DWELL IN BNC Rear Panel
Model Number V/GHz Output
V/GHz OUT BNC Rear Panel
AUX I/O 25-pin D-type Rear Panel 68337B, 68345B, 68347B 1.0V/GHz
SERIAL I/O RJ45 Rear Panel 68353B, 68355B, 68359B 0.5V/GHz
IEEE-488 GPIB Type 57 Rear Panel 68363B, 68365B, 68369B 0.5V/GHz
68375B, 68377B 0.25V/GHz
68385B, 68387B 0.25V/GHz
AM IN: Accepts an external signal to amplitude modulate
the RF output signal. Front or rear-panel input, 50W or 600W 68395B, 68397B 0.25V/GHz
impedance, both selectable from front-panel modulation
menu.
FM/FM IN: Accepts an external signal to frequency/phase
modulate the RF output signal. Front or rear-panel input, AUX I/O (Auxiliary Input/Output): Provides for most of
50W or 600W impedance, both selectable from front-panel the rear panel BNC connections through a single, 25-pin,
modulation menu. D-type connector. Supports master-slave operation with an-
PULSE TRIGGER IN: Accepts an external TTL compatible other 68XXXB synthesizer or allows for a single-cable inter-
signal to pulse modulate the RF output signal or trigger or face with the Model 562 Scalar Network Analyzer and other
gate the internal pulse generator. Front or rear-panel input, ANRITSU instruments. For a pinout diagram and descrip-
selectable from front-panel modulation menu. tions, see Appendix A, Figure A-2.
EXT ALC IN (External ALC Input): Provides for leveling SERIAL I/O (Serial Input/Output): Provides access to
the RF output signal externally with either a detector or RS-232 terminal ports to support service and calibration
power meter. Signal requirements are shown in the RF Out- functions and master-slave operations.
put specifications on page B-16. IEEE-488 GPIB: Provides input/output connections for the
RF OUTPUT: Provides for RF output from 50W impedance General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB). For a pinout dia-
source. K and V Connector, female. Option 9 moves the RF gram, see Appendix A, Figure A-3.
Output connector to the rear panel.

682XXB/683XXB OM B-21
PERFORMANCE SERIES 683XXB
SPECIFICATIONS SYNTHESIZED SIGNAL GENERATOR

OPTIONS Option 10, Complex Modulation Capability: Provides

user defined wave capability for complex modulation. Re-
Option 1, Rack Mounting: Rack mount kit containing a quires computer/controller (not included). Includes cable
set of track slides (90° tilt capability), mounting ears, and and Windows based software. (Not available in combination
front panel handles to let the instrument be mounted in a with Option 7.)
standard 19-inch equipment rack. Option 11, 0.1 Hz Frequency Resolution: Provides fre-
Option 2A, 110 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step quency resolution of 0.1 Hz.
attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high-end Option 14, ANRITSU 360B VNA Compatibility: Modifies
frequency of £26.5 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. rack mounting hardware to mate unit in a ANRITSU 360B
Option 2B, 110 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step VNA console.
attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high-end Option 15B, High Power Output: Adds high-power RF
frequency of £40 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. components to the instrument in the 2-26.5 GHz frequency
Option 2C, 90 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step range. Option 15B is standard in models having a high-end
attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high-end frequency that is >40 GHz.
frequency of £50 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. Option 16, High-Stability Time Base: Adds an ovenized,
Option 2D, 90 dB Step Attenuator: Adds a 10 dB/step 10 MHz crystal oscillator as a high-stability time base.
attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high-end Option 17A, Delete Front Panel: Deletes the front panel
frequency of £60 GHz. Rated RF output power is reduced. for use in remote control applications where a front panel
Option 6, Phase Modulation (FM): Adds phase modula- display and keyboard control are not needed.
tion capability. The internal FM generator becomes the Option 18, mmWave Module Bias Output: Provides bias
FM/FM generator. (Not available in combination with Option output for 54000-xWRxx Millimeter Wave Source Modules.
7.) BNC Twinax connector, rear panel. (Not available in combi-
Option 7, Delete AM/FM Generator Deletes the internal nation with Option 20.)
AM and FM generators. External AM and FM capability re- Option 19, SCPI Programmability: Adds GPIB command
mains unchanged. (Not available in combination with Option mnemonics complying with Standard Commands for Pro-
6, 8, or 20.) grammable Instruments (SCPI), Version 1993.0 SCPI pro-
Option 8, Internal Power Meter: Adds an internal power gramming complies with IEEE 488.2-1987.
meter that is compatible with ANRITSU 560-7, 5400-71, or Option 20, SCAN Modulator: Adds an internal SCAN
6400-71 series detectors. (Not available in combination with modulator for simulating high-depth amplitude modulated
Option 7.) signals in models 68337B, 68345B, and 68347B only. Re-
Option 9, Rear Panel RF Output: Moves the RF output quires an external modulating signal input. (Not available in
connector to the rear panel. combination with Option 7 or 18.)

B-22 682XXB/683XXB OM
 Subject Index

0-9 CW Frequency Mode

Menu Map, 4-6
682XXB/683XXB
Selecting a CW Frequency, 3-21
Front Panel Layout, 3-6
Selecting a Power Level, 3-23
General Description, 1-3
Selecting CW Mode, 3-21
Manual, Electronic, 1-8
CW Power Sweep Mode
Manuals, Related, 1-8
Menu Map, 4-11
Models, List of, 1-4 - 1-7
Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-46
Options, List of, 1-9
Selecting a Sweep Trigger, 3-45
Performance Specifications, B-1
Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode, 3-43
Rear Panel Layout, A-2
Setting Dwell Time, 3-44
Setting Step Size, 3-44
A CW Ramp, 3-24
ALC, 3-50
Alternate Sweep Frequency Mode D
Activating the Alternate Sweep, 3-36
Data Display
Selecting a Power Level, 3-38
Description, 3-8
Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-37
Menu Display Format, 3-9
Selecting Alternate Sweep, 3-36
Menu Keys, 3-10
AM Mode
Data Entry Area
Menu Map, 4-14
Description, 3-12
Operating Modes, 3-63
Default (Reset) Parameters, 3-16 - 3-17
Providing AM, 3-63
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode
Menu Map, 4-7
E
Selecting a Power Level, 3-33 Entering Data
Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-31 Editing the Current Value, 3-19
Selecting Alternate Sweep, 3-36 Entering a New Value, 3-20
Selecting Analog Sweep Mode, 3-25 Opening the Parameter, 3-18
Setting a Sweep Trigger, 3-27 Setting Increment Sizes, 3-94
Setting the Sweep Time, 3-26 Error Messages
Using Frequency Markers, 3-34 Operation Related, 6-8
Self Test, 6-3 - 6-7
C
Calibration, Reference Oscillator, 3-100
F
Connectors Fixed Power Level Mode
Front Panel, 3-7 Menu Map, 4-10
Rear Panel, A-1 Selecting a Power Level, 3-39
CW Frequency Accuracy Test Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode, 3-39
Test Procedure, 5-6 FM Mode
Test Records, 5-7 - 5-12 Menu Map, 4-15
Test Setup, 5-5 Operating Modes, 3-68
Providing FM, 3-68

682XXB/683XXB OM Index 1
SUBJECT G
INDEX M

Frequency Control M
Frequency List, 3-22
Maintenance, Routine
Selecting a Preset Frequency, 3-22
Display Cleaning, 6-15
Selecting a Preset Sweep Range, 3-32
Fan Filter Cleaning, 6-14
Setting a Preset Sweep Range, 3-33
Line Fuse Replacement, 6-15
Frequency Markers
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode
Intensity Markers, 3-34
Menu Map, 4-9
Marker List, 3-34
Selecting a Power Level, 3-33
Video Markers, 3-34
Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-31
Frequency Modes
Selecting Manual Sweep Mode, 3-30
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Manual, Electronic, 1-8
CW Frequency Mode, 3-21
Manual, GPIB Programming, 1-8
Manual Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Manual, Maintenance, 1-9
Step Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Manual, SCPI Programming, 1-8
Frequency Scaling, 3-87
Markers, Frequency, 3-34
Front Panel
Master-Slave Operation, 7-4
Connectors, 3-7
Menu Maps
Data Display Area, 3-6, 3-8
AM Mode, 4-14
Data Entry Area, 3-7, 3-12
Analog Sweep Frequency Mode, 4-7
Description, 3-6
CW Frequency Mode, 4-6
Layout, 3-6
CW Power Sweep Mode, 4-11
Description, 4-3
G Fixed Power Level Mode, 4-10
General Description, 1-3 FM Mode, 4-15
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Leveling Modes, 4-13
Address, 2-7 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode, 4-9
Cable Length Restrictions, 2-7 Phase Modulation Mode (Option 6), 4-16
Interface Connector, 2-7 Pulse Modulation Mode, 4-17
Line Terminator, 2-9 Sample Menu Map, 4-5
Native Interface Language, 2-9 Step Sweep Frequency Mode, 4-8
SCPI Interface Language, 2-9 Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode, 4-12
Setup and Interconnection, 2-7 System Configuration, 4-18
Messages
I Error, 6-3 - 6-8
Status, 6-10
Identification Number, 1-8
Warning, 6-10
Initial Inspection, 2-3
Models, List of
Series 682XXB, 1-4 - 1-5
L Series 683XXB, 1-6 - 1-7
Level Offset, 3-42 Modulation Modes
Leveling Operations AM Mode, 3-63
ALC Power Slope, 3-55 FM Mode, 3-63
Attenuator Decoupling, 3-54 Phase Modulation Mode (Option 6), 3-63
External Leveling, 3-51 Pulse Modulation Mode, 3-63
Fixed Gain, 3-53 Scan Modulation (Option 20), 3-98
Internal Leveling, 3-51
Menu Map, 4-13
Selecting a Leveling Mode, 3-50
User Cal (User Level Flatness Correction), 3-57

Index 2 682XXB/683XXB OM
SUBJECT O
INDEX S

O R
Operating Environment, 2-6 Rear Panel Connectors, A-1
Operational Verification Tests, 5-3 Recommended Test Equipment, 1-11
Operator Maintenance Reference Oscillator Calibration, 3-100
Error and Warning/Status Messages, 6-3 Reset (Default) Parameters, 3-16 - 3-17
Routine Maintenance, 6-14
Troubleshooting, 6-11 S
Options. List of, 1-9
Saving/Recalling Instrument Setups, 3-95
Scan Modulation (Option 20), 3-98
P Scope of Manual, 1-3
Performance Specifications, 1-10, B-1 Secure Operation, 3-97
682XXB, B-3 Self Test
683XXB, B-13 Error Messages, 6-3 - 6-7
Phase Modulation Mode (Option 6) From System Menu, 3-15
Menu Map, 4-16 Service Centers, 2-14
Operating Modes, 3-73 Specifications, Performance
Providing Phase Modulation, 3-73 682XXB, B-3
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests 683XXB, B-13
Accuracy Test Procedure, 5-14 SS Mode Operation, 7-12
Flatness Test Procedure, 5-15 Start Up, 3-14
Test Records, 5-19 - 5-64 Start-Up Display, 3-14
Test Setup, 5-13 Step Sweep Frequency Mode
Power Level Control Menu Map, 4-8
Level List, 3-40 Selecting a Power Level, 3-33
Selecting a Preset Power Level, 3-40 Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-31
Selecting a Preset Sweep Range, 3-47 Selecting Alternate Sweep, 3-36
Setting a Preset Sweep Range, 3-47 Selecting Step Sweep Mode, 3-28
Power Level Modes Setting a Sweep Trigger, 3-27
CW Power Sweep Mode, 3-43 Setting Dwell Time, 3-29
Fixed Power Level Mode, 3-39 Setting Step Size, 3-29
Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode, 3-43 Using Frequency Markers, 3-34
Power Level Offset, 3-42 Sweep Frequency Modes
Power Meter, Internal (Option 8), 3-99 Analog Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Power Requirements, 2-4 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Preparation for Storage/Shipment, 2-13 Step Sweep Frequency Mode, 3-25
Preparation for Use, 2-4 Sweep Frequency/Step Power Mode
Line Voltage Selection, 2-4 Menu Map, 4-12
Operating Environment, 2-6 Selecting a Sweep Frequency/Step
Power Requirements, 2-4 Power Mode, 3-48
Standby Operation, 2-5 Selecting a Sweep Range, 3-46
Warmup Time, 2-6 Setting Step Size, 3-49
Pulse Modulation Mode System Configuration
Menu Map, 4-17 Configuring the Front Panel, 3-87
Operating Modes, 3-77 Configuring the GPIB, 3-91
Providing Pulse Modulation, 3-78 Configuring the Rear Panel, 3-88
Configuring the RF, 3-89
Frequency Scaling, 3-87
Menu Map, 4-18
Setting Increment Sizes, 3-94

682XXB/683XXB OM Index 3
SUBJECT T
INDEX U

T U
Test Equipment, 1-11, 5-3 Use With Other Instruments
Testing, Operational Verification Master-Slave Operation with a 68XXXB, 7-4
CW Frequency Accuracy, 5-5 Use with a 360B Vector Network Analyzer, 7-11
Initial 682XXB/683XXB Checkout, 5-4 Use with a 562 Scalar Network Analyzer, 7-10
Power Level Accuracy and Flatness, 5-13 Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer, 7-16
Test Equipment, 5-3 Use with a HP8757D Scalar Network
Test Records, 5-3, 5-7 - 5-12, 5-19 - 5-64 Analyzer, 7-20
Troubleshooting Tables, 6-11 - 6-13

Index 4 682XXB/683XXB OM